JP2008178613A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To prevent a derivation and a display of a special display result when determining that the combination of identification information as a display result of a variable display does not become a special display result. <P>SOLUTION: In a reach-less (no ready-to-win condition) failure determination process, this game machine compares a determination value in a left symbol selection table (T-1) with a left symbol determination random number value to determine a left symbol (S1002), and compares a determination value in a right symbol selection table (T-2) with a right symbol determination random number value to determine a right symbol (S1004). Then, when determining a middle symbol, this game machine selects a middle symbol selection table (T-3), which never becomes a chance pip corresponding to the left/right symbols, using a chance pip prohibition table (T-4) (S1006), compares a determination value in the selected middle symbol selection table with a middle symbol determination random number value, and determines the middle symbol (S1007). After the reach is produced and the middle symbol consisting a big win symbol passes a valid line of the reach symbol, this game machine develops it to a super reach. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2008,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention includes a variable display device having a plurality of variable display portions capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified, and when a combination of identification information is a specific display result as a display result of variable display A game in which a special effect is executed during variable display of identification information on a variable display device when a transition is made to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player and the combination of identification information becomes a special display result as a display result of variable display Related to the machine.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, which is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display device becomes a specific display result. Some are configured to be controllable to a specific gaming state.

  The specific game state means a state advantageous for a player who is given a predetermined game value. Specifically, the specific game state is, for example, a state in which a special variable winning device is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a ball (a big hit game state), or a state in which a right to be advantageous for a player has occurred. In this state, a predetermined game value such as a state where conditions for paying out premium game media are easily established is given.

  In such a gaming machine, the fact that the display result of the variable display device that displays the symbol as the identification information becomes a combination of specific display modes (specific display result) determined in advance is generally referred to as “big hit”. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Further, when a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the V zone provided in the big prize opening) is not established at the time when the big prize opening is closed, the big hit gaming state is ended.

  In addition, when a special condition such as a special display result (special display result) of the specific display result is established in the variable display device in the variable display device, the game machine subsequently receives a big hit. Some are configured to shift to a high-probability state (also referred to as a probabilistic variation state) in which the probability of occurrence of the occurrence is high.

  In the following Patent Document 1, if the result of the big hit determination is out of place, after determining the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol (left and right symbols), different tables are obtained depending on whether or not reach is reached. A gaming machine is disclosed that uses a difference value for a specific symbol (the number of deviations relative to a first stop symbol or a second stop symbol) to determine a final stop symbol by adding the difference value to the second stop symbol. Yes.

JP 2003-164613 (paragraphs 0048-0057, FIGS. 8-10)

  By the way, in the gaming machine, a special combination called a chance item (special display result) is stopped and displayed on the variable display device, so that the player changes to a state advantageous to the player such as a small hit. In addition to the privilege to be performed, there is also a notification informing that a privilege on production such as the development of the production to super reach is included). As a chance, the symbol combination is usually a combination of symbols different from the jackpot symbol (the combination of the left, middle and right symbols being the same symbol) and the reach symbol (the combination of the left and right symbols being the same symbol). In a gaming machine that stops and displays such a chance eye, if the symbol is determined by the method described in Patent Document 1, there is a possibility that the stop symbol may become a chance even when a privilege is not given.

  Accordingly, the present invention provides a gaming machine capable of preventing the special display result from being derived and displayed when it is determined that the combination of identification information is not the special display result as the variable display display result. With the goal.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a plurality of variable display portions (for example, left, middle, and right display areas) that can variably display a plurality of types of identification information (for example, left, middle, and right decorative symbols) that can each be identified. A variable display device (for example, a variable display device 9), and a specific game state (for example, advantageous for the player when the combination of identification information becomes a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) as a display result of variable display) The combination of identification information as a variable display result is a special display result (for example, chance A, chance B, sudden chance pattern (sudden probability variation pattern), small chance chance A special effect is executed during the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device (for example, when the chance eyes A and B are reached), the super reach is reached. Developed and executed a chance round chance game for 2 rounds of sudden chance change game when it was a chance to win, and then played in the chance mode. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes an effect in the chance mode after executing the game, and a gaming control microcomputer (for example, a gaming control microcomputer 560) that controls the progress of the game; An effect control microcomputer for controlling the display state of the variable display device (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100), and the game control microcomputer determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit) Whether or not) and a variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern) of variable display of identification information Predetermining means to be determined in advance (for example, a part for executing steps S57, S58, S201 to S212 in the game control microcomputer 560) and a predetermining command (for example, a variation pattern) that can specify the determination result of the predetermining means A command for transmitting a command, a symbol information designation command) (for example, a control for transmitting a variation pattern command and a symbol information designation command in the ornament symbol command control process (step S28) in the game control microcomputer 560) The production control microcomputer includes reach identification information other than final stop identification information (for example, middle symbol) that is derived and displayed last when it becomes reach and is not shifted to the specific gaming state. Reach to determine reach design Reach identification information random number (for example, reach design determination random number), difference determination random number (for example, max113) for determining a difference between reach identification information and final stop identification information (for example, design difference with respect to reach design) A random number for design determination), a non-specific display result that is different from the specific display result that is derived and displayed when the game is not reached and the game is not shifted to a specific gaming state (for example, a non-reachable design (does not play design) that does not become reach) First identification information random number (for example, left symbol determination random number) for determining one identification information (for example, left symbol), second identification information (for example, right symbol) and third identification information (for example, middle symbol) Numerical value updating means for updating the numerical values of the second identification information random number (for example, the right symbol determination random number) and the third identification information random number (for example, the medium symbol determination random number of max97) (for example, The part that executes step S706 in the production control microcomputer 100), and the reach identification information random number, the difference determination random number, the first identification information random number, the second identification information random number, and the third identification information from the numerical value updating means at a predetermined time. A variable display device based on numerical value extraction means for extracting a numerical value of a random number (for example, a portion for executing steps S1001, S1003, S1005, S1011, S1014, S1018, and S1021 in the production control microcomputer 100) and a predetermined command. Identification information determining means for determining from among a plurality of types of combinations of identification information derived and displayed as display results on a plurality of variable display sections in (for example, a portion executing steps S621, S626, and S632 in the production control microcomputer 100) And pre-decision Based on reception of the command, the variable display device starts variable display of the identification information, and is determined by the identification information determination means when a variable display time (for example, variable time) that can be specified from the variable display pattern has elapsed. Variable display control means for deriving and displaying a combination of identification information (for example, a portion that executes steps S800 to S803 in the effect control process (step S705) in the effect control microcomputer 100), and variable display control means , After deriving and displaying the reach identification information determined by the identification information determination means based on the fact that the reach is specified as a special reach (for example, super reach) based on the pre-determined command, Final stop identification that composes the specific display result in combination with identification information A reach effect that develops into a special reach after the information (for example, the middle symbol “7” when the reach symbol is “7”) passes the constituent position (for example, the position on the active line) of the specific display result is executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 110, the middle symbol “7” temporarily stops after one frame has passed the position on the effective line in the middle stage, and then changes again and develops into super reach.) Determines whether or not to obtain a special display result based on a predetermined command (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 performs steps S659, S674, S677, S682, S1023, S1026, S1040, S1051, S1112, and S1117). , S1139, S1144), and when it is determined that the result is a special display result, the combination of identification information derived and displayed is determined. In particular, the display result is determined (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S663, S679, S680B, S684, S1025, S1028, S1042, S1053, S1114, S1119, S1141, and S1146) and based on the predetermined command. Thus, when it is specified that the game has reached reach and is not shifted to the specific gaming state (for example, Y in step S651, Y in S653), the reach identification information table in which control data (for example, determination value) is allocated to the reach identification information The identification information associated with the control data that matches the extracted reach identification information random number (for example, the reach design selection table shown in FIGS. 54 to 56) is determined as reach identification information (for example, reach design). (For example, a micro control for production control The data 100 executes 1013, S1017, and S1020), and the difference determination table in which the control data is allocated to the difference (for example, the symbol selection table during normal deviation shown in FIG. 57, the symbol during super development shown in FIG. 58) The difference value associated with the control data that matches the numerical value of the difference determination random number extracted in the selection table) is determined as the difference between the reach identification information and the final stop identification information (for example, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol), The final stop identification information is determined based on the difference from the reach identification information (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S1015, S1019, and S1022). (For example, Y in step S651, S653) N), the control data matching the numerical value of the first identification information random number extracted in the first identification information table (for example, the left symbol selection table shown in FIG. 45) in which the control data is allocated to the first identification information. The associated identification information is determined as the first identification information (for example, the left symbol) (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes step S1002), and the second identification information is assigned with the control data. The identification information associated with the control data matching the numerical value of the second identification information random number extracted in the identification information table (for example, the right symbol selection table shown in FIG. 46) is the second identification information (for example, the right symbol). (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes step S1004), and the combination of identification information derived and displayed is the special display result. The third identification information random number extracted in the third identification information table (for example, the middle symbol selection table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51) in which control data is allocated to the third identification information. The identification information associated with the control data to be determined is determined as the third identification information (for example, middle symbol) (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S1006 and S1007).

  When the identification information determining means specifies that the game state is to be shifted to the specific gaming state based on the pre-determined command (for example, Y in S656, Y in S659, Y in S671, Y in S674, Y in S682), Data set so that the ratio of the identification information combination to be derived and displayed is determined to be non-uniform (for example, the jackpot symbol selection table shown in FIGS. 70 to 87) (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S658, S661, S673, S676, and S683).

  As a display result of variable display, when the combination of identification information becomes a special display result (for example, a probable variation pattern) of the specific display results, the display of the variable display is compared with the normal display after the specific gaming state is ended. A gaming machine that shifts to a special gaming state (for example, a probable change state) in which a combination of identification information is likely to become a specific display result as a display result, and the pre-determining means determines whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (probability big hit And whether or not to execute a special notification effect that notifies after the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed that the transition to the special gaming state is performed (for example, whether or not the promotion effect is executed) and the special The timing for executing the notification effect (for example, whether to execute the promotion effect during the big hit or during the ending) is also determined before the derivation display of the display result ( For example, the steps S61 and S62 in the game control microcomputer 560 are executed), and the identification information determination means executes the special notification effect when it is determined that the game state is not shifted to the special game state based on the predetermined command. (For example, Y in step S659, Y in S671), the combination of identification information derived and displayed is determined to be a non-special display result (for example, a non-probable variable pattern) different from the special display result (for example, The production control microcomputer 100 may execute steps S661 and S673).

  The identification information includes special identification information that is a special display result when the combination of identification information results in a specific display result (for example, a specific symbol among the decorative symbols “1” to “8”), and the identification information. Non-special identification information that becomes a non-special display result when the combination of is a special display result (for example, a decorative pattern of “1” to “8” is a pattern other than a specific one of them) and is special The identification information displayed in the gaming state is a ratio of special identification information compared to the identification information displayed in the normal state (for example, the ratio of specific symbols included in the decorative symbols, that is, the proportion of specific symbols). (For example, “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” and “8” are specific symbols in the normal gaming state, and “1”, “3”, “5” and “6” in the probable variation state. “7” and “8” may be a specific symbol).

  A gaming machine that shifts to a special gaming state (for example, a probable variation state) based on a combination of identification information as a display result of a variable display resulting in a special display result (for example, a sudden probability variation pattern). When it is determined that the display result is a special display result based on the pre-determined command (for example, N in step S659, Y in S677), and when it is determined that the special game state is to be entered based on the pre-determined command, The combination of identification information derived and displayed may be determined as a special display result (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S663 and S679).

  In the variable display device, a plurality of effective lines capable of deriving and displaying the combination of identification information are set in advance (for example, five lines of upper, middle, lower, lower right, and upper right are set), and special display is performed during variable display of the identification information. Game machine that derives and displays special display results (for example, chance chances for sudden hits, chances for small hits) on a specific active line (for example, middle line) among a plurality of active lines When the identification information determining means specifies that the game does not reach and does not shift to the specific gaming state (for example, Y in step S651, N in S653), an effective line other than the specific active line (for example, , Upper, lower, lower right, and upper right lines), the third identification information table set so that the combination of identification information does not result in a special display result. The third identification information is determined using (for example, the middle symbol selection table that does not establish the chance eye prohibition pattern shown in FIGS. 49 to 51) (for example, the middle symbol using the chance eye prohibition table in step S1006). The selection table may be selected, and the middle symbol may be determined using the middle symbol selection table in step S1007).

  A plurality of effective lines capable of deriving and displaying combinations of identification information in the variable display device are set in advance (for example, five lines of upper, middle, lower, lower right, and upper right are set). When reach is established in the active line (for example, when single reach is established in Y of step S1012), and when reach is established in a plurality of active lines (for example, when double reach is established in Y of step S1012). Thus, the difference is determined using the difference determination table (for example, the symbol selection table during normal deviation shown in FIG. 57) to which the control data is allocated so that the difference between the reach identification information and the final stop identification information is different. It may be configured to determine.

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, the identification information determining means determines whether or not to obtain a special display result based on a pre-determined command, and the identification information that is derived and displayed when it is determined to be the special display result When the combination is determined as a special display result, and it is specified that it will be reached and will not be transferred to a specific gaming state based on a pre-determined command, it will be extracted in the reach identification information table in which control data is allocated to the reach identification information. The identification information associated with the control data matching the reach identification information random number is determined as the reach identification information, and the difference determination random number extracted in the difference determination table in which the control data is allocated to the difference The difference value associated with the matching control data is determined as the difference between the reach identification information and the final stop identification information, and the reach identification information When the final stop identification information is determined based on the difference between the first identification information and the non-reach and the transition to the specific gaming state is specified based on the predetermined command, the first identification in which the control data is allocated to the first identification information. The second identification information table in which the identification information associated with the control data matching the numerical value of the first identification information random number extracted in the information table is determined as the first identification information, and the control data is allocated to the second identification information. The identification information associated with the control data matching the numerical value of the second identification information random number extracted in step 2 is determined as the second identification information, and the combination of the identification information derived and displayed is not the special display result. 3 is associated with control data that matches the value of the third identification information random number extracted in the third identification information table in which control data is assigned to the identification information. The identification information is configured to determine a third identification information. Therefore, when it is determined that the combination of identification information is not the special display result (chance) as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to reliably prevent the special display result from being derived and displayed. Further, since the first identification information, the second identification information, and the third identification information are determined using the first identification information random number, the second identification information random number, and the third identification information random number, respectively, the reach is not reached. The combination of the identification information in the non-specific display result (the defocused design) is varied. Further, the variable display control means derives and displays the reach identification information determined by the identification information determination means on the basis of specifying that the reach is a special reach among the reach based on the pre-determined command. It is configured to execute a reach effect that develops into a special reach after the final stop identification information that constitutes the specific display result in combination with the identification information passes the configuration position of the specific display result, improving the interest of the game Can be made.

  In the invention according to claim 2, when the identification information determining means specifies that the game state is to be shifted to the specific game state based on the pre-determined command, any specific display result is obtained by combining the derived identification information. Therefore, the specific display results can be determined at an arbitrary ratio.

  In the invention described in claim 3, when the identification information determining means specifies not to shift to the special gaming state or to execute the special notification effect based on the predetermined command, it is derived and displayed. Since the combination of the identification information is determined to be the non-special display result, the expectation for the transition to the special gaming state can be maintained even after the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed.

  In the invention according to claim 4, the identification information displayed during the special gaming state has a higher proportion of special identification information than the identification information displayed during the normal state. It is possible to make the player think that the ratio of the special display result being derived and displayed is higher than the time, and as a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The invention according to claim 5 is a gaming machine that shifts to a special gaming state based on the combination of identification information as a special display result as a display result of variable display, wherein the identification information determination means includes a predetermined command. When it is determined that the display result is a special display result, the combination of identification information to be derived and displayed is determined to be the special display result even when it is specified that the game state is shifted to the special game state based on the predetermined command. Since the specific display result is not derived and displayed when shifting to the special gaming state, it can be recognized that the transition has been made to the special gaming state without shifting to the specific gaming state. Can be increased. In addition, since the combination of identification information that is not derived and displayed as the non-specific display result is derived and displayed as the special display result, the player can be surely recognized that the player has shifted to the special gaming state.

  In the invention described in claim 6, when the identification information determination means specifies that the reach is not reached and the game state is not shifted to the specific gaming state, the combination of the identification information is also displayed on the active line other than the specific active line. Since the third identification information is determined using the third identification information table set so as not to result, the player is not misunderstood that the special display result is derived and displayed. be able to.

  In the invention according to claim 7, the identification information determining means determines whether the reach identification information and the final stop identification information are reached when reach is established in a single effective line and when reach is established in a plurality of effective lines. Since the difference is determined using the difference determination table to which the control data is allocated so that the difference is different, the non-specific display result close to the specific display result depending on the number of effective lines to reach It is possible to vary the ratio of (for example, a one-frame misaligned symbol). In addition, it is possible to reliably prevent the specific display result from being derived and displayed when the non-specific display result is derived and displayed after reaching a plurality of effective lines, and to reach the single effective line. The combination of identification information in the non-specific display result (reach lose symbol) that is derived and displayed after becoming various becomes various.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. In the following embodiments, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can be applied to other gaming machines such as a slot machine.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (excluding a game board described later). Is a structure including

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for launching the game balls are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  Near the center of the game area 7 variably display and display a plurality of types of decorative patterns for presentation that can be identified based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, a hitting ball has entered the start winning opening 14). A variable display device 9 for deriving and displaying the result is arranged. In this embodiment, the variable display device 9 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and the decorative symbols are arranged in the vertical direction (in this embodiment, in the left, middle and right display regions (decorative symbol display areas)). , From top to bottom) is variably displayed. In the display area of each of the left, middle, and right columns, three consecutive decorative symbols are stopped and displayed when variable display of decorative symbols is stopped (see FIG. 3 and the like).

  Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result is to stop and display the symbols (excluding temporary stop before execution of the so-called re-lottery effect and temporary stop before execution of the relief effect).

  In this embodiment, as the decorative symbols displayed in the three display areas of the variable display device 9, as shown in FIG. 2, a number symbol “1” to “8” and a blank between the number symbols are used. The symbol “*” shown is used. During variable display (fluctuation) of decorative symbols, as a general rule, the left display area displays "8", "*", "7" ... "*" decorative symbols in numerical order, and the middle and right display areas , “1”, “*”, “2”... “*” Are displayed in numerical order. Note that the decorative symbol displayed in the left display area is called “left symbol”, the decorative symbol displayed in the middle display region is called “middle symbol”, and the decorative symbol displayed in the right display region is “ Sometimes referred to as “right design”.

  A special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8 that variably displays a special symbol as identification information is provided on the variable display device 9. In this embodiment, the special symbol display 8 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers “0” to “9”, for example. The special symbol display 8 may be configured to variably display a larger number of numbers such as “0” to “99” in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp a specific stop symbol.

  The variable display device 9 performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (production) during the variable symbol display period of the special symbol by the special symbol indicator 8. The variable display device 9 that performs variable display of decorative symbols is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. The special symbol display 8 for performing variable display of special symbols is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board.

  At the bottom of the variable display device 9, a special symbol hold memory display comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the start winning opening 14, that is, the number of hold memories (also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). 18 is provided. Every time there is an effective start prize, the display color of one display is changed. Each time the variable display on the special symbol display 8 is started, the display color of one display is restored. In this example, since the special symbol display 8 and the special symbol hold memory display 18 are provided separately, the number of hold memories can be displayed even during variable display. In the display area of the variable display device 9, a special symbol reserved storage display area including four display areas for displaying the number of reserved memories may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved memories is 4, but the upper limit value may be a larger value. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

  Below the variable display device 9, there is provided a start winning opening 14 through which a game ball can be won. The game ball won in the start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the start opening switch 14a. The start winning opening 14 is provided with a variable winning ball device 15 that performs an opening / closing operation. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16 (not shown in FIG. 1). When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, it becomes easy for the game ball to win the start winning opening 14 (easy to start winning), which is advantageous for the player.

  A special variable winning device that is opened by the solenoid 21 in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is provided below the start winning opening 14. The special variable winning device includes an opening / closing plate 20 and forms a big winning opening. The game ball that has entered the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided directly above the variable display device 9. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When a game ball wins the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the left and right lamps (a symbol can be visually recognized when the lamp is lit). For example, if the left lamp is lit when the variable display ends, it is a hit. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 changes from a disadvantageous state to a player's advantageous state when the normal symbol is a winning symbol. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time a game ball passes to the gate 32, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, every time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  The game board 6 is provided with a plurality of winning holes 29, 30, 33, 39, and winning of game balls to the winning holes 29, 30, 33, 39 is performed by winning hole switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, respectively. Detected. Each winning opening 29, 30, 33, 39 constitutes a winning area provided in the game board 6 as an area for accepting game balls and allowing winning. The start winning opening 14 and the big winning opening also constitute a winning area that accepts game balls and allows winning. Decorative lamps 25 flashing and displayed during the game are provided around the left and right of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and there is an out port 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won a prize. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c are provided. Further, a decoration LED is installed around each structure (such as a big prize opening) in the game area 7. The top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the decorative LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the gaming machine.

  Also, below the left speaker 27 is provided a prize ball LED 51 that is lit while paying out the prize ball, and below the right speaker 27 is provided a ball break LED 52 that is lit when the supply ball is cut. Yes. Further, a prepaid card unit that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown). In addition, a status indicator for notifying the player of the gaming state inside the gaming machine (a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, and a short time state, which will be described later) is provided at a predetermined location on the gaming board 6 (not shown). ).

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. If the game ball enters the start winning port 14 and is detected by the start port switch 14a, the special symbol display device is in a state where variable display of the special symbol can be started (for example, the end of the big hit game or the end of the previous variable display). 8, variable display (variation) of the special symbol is started, and variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the variable display device 9. If the variable symbol special display cannot be started, the reserved memory number for the special symbol storage memory display 18 is increased by one.

  The variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and the decorative symbol on the variable display device 9 stops when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the stop symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a probable change symbol (excluding a sudden probability change symbol described later) or a non-probable change symbol in the big hit symbol, it shifts to a big hit gaming state (probable big hit or non-probable big hit (usually also called big hit)). . That is, the special variable prize-winning device is opened until a certain time (for example, 29.5 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the big prize opening. It should be noted that one round in the big hit gaming state is a period from when the special variable winning device is opened until a predetermined period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, ten) of hitting balls wins the big winning opening. In this embodiment, when the stop symbol is changed to the jackpot gaming state based on the probability variation symbol (excluding the sudden probability variation symbol described later) or the non-probability variation symbol, the jackpot gaming state is continued for 15 rounds. The

  In addition, when the stop symbol at the time of the stop becomes a special probability variation symbol (hereinafter referred to as a sudden probability variation symbol), a special jackpot gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “suddenly sudden”) that makes the player recognize that the gaming state has suddenly shifted to the certain probability variation state. It is called probable big hit.) In the case of sudden probability big hit, the special variable winning device is opened twice for a short period (for example, 5 seconds). In the sudden probability change big hit, it is one round from when the special variable winning device is opened until it is closed, and the gaming state of the sudden probability change big hit is continued for two rounds. It should be noted that in the sudden odds and losses, the period during which the special variable prize-winning device is opened is short, and ten game balls do not win while the special variable prize-winning device is open. Therefore, until ten game balls win the big prize opening. Need not be defined as one round. When a sudden odd jackpot suddenly occurs, unlike the big hit of 15 rounds, the effects of each round do not proceed in sequence on the variable display device 9, but the game state suddenly shifts to the probable state. A special performance is performed to show the person.

  Further, when the stop symbol at the time of the stop becomes a small hit symbol, the game shifts to a small hit game state in which the game value given to the player is smaller than the big hit game state. That is, it shifts to a gaming state in which the special variable winning device is opened twice only for a short period (for example, 5 seconds). In this way, in the small hit game state, the same game value as the game value given to the player when a sudden probability change big hit occurs is given. However, unlike the case of sudden probability change big hit, the gaming state is not shifted to the probability changing state after the small hit gaming state ends. For this reason, the player expects sudden occurrence of a probable big hit rather than a small hit. Even when a small hit occurs, a special effect similar to that at the time of sudden big odd hit is executed. Such a special effect is called a two-round effect. As for the effects for 2 rounds, there are a direct-only effect that is executed when a sudden odd-change big hit occurs, and a double-adjusted effect that is executed when either sudden sudden change big hit or small hit occurs. is there.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the variable display device 9 are synchronized. Here, the synchronization means that the variable display period (variable display time) is the same. In addition, the display result on the special symbol display 8 (a special symbol stop symbol) corresponds to the display result on the variable display device 9 (decorative symbol stop symbol). The correspondence between the two symbols will be described later.

  Next, the type of gaming state and the transition of gaming state will be described.

  The probability variation state (probability variation state) refers to a gaming state that is advantageous to a player who has a higher probability of making a big hit (that is, the symbol is a big hit symbol) than the normal gaming state and the short-time state. In this embodiment, the term “probability change state” does not include a short time state of probability change described later unless explicitly stated.

  The time-short state (time shortening state) is a gaming state in which the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and the variable display time (variation time) of the decorative symbol on the variable display device 9 are shorter than the normal gaming state and the probability variation state. I mean. By reducing the variable display time in this manner, the variable display of symbols is frequently executed, and the probability of jackpot per unit time is improved, resulting in an advantageous state for the player. In the short time state, in the normal symbol display 10, the probability that the stop symbol becomes a winning symbol is higher than that in the normal gaming state and the probability variation state, and one of the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball device 15 or Both are higher than the normal gaming state and the probability variation state, and become a more advantageous state for the player. In the short time state, the variable symbol display time (variation time) of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 10 is shorter than that of the normal game state and the probability change state, which makes the player more advantageous. In this embodiment, the term “short-time state” does not include a short-time state of probability change described later unless explicitly stated.

  The probability change short state means a game state that is a probability change state and a time short state. The probabilistic short time state is a very advantageous state for the player.

  In this embodiment, the gaming state transitions as follows.

(1) When the normal game state and the short-time state, the probability change symbol (excluding the sudden probability variation symbol) is a big hit, and when the big hit game ends, the game state is shifted from the normal game state and the short-time state to the probability change time-short state. . As a result, the probability that the special symbol and the normal symbol stop symbol become a winning symbol is increased, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased.

(2) When the probability variation state and the probability variation time short state, the probability variation symbol (excluding sudden probability variation symbol) will be a big hit, and when the big hit game is finished, if the game state is the probability variation state, it will shift to the probability variation time short state, When the gaming state is the short state at the time of probability change, the short state at the time of probability change is maintained without changing. Thereby, the probability that the special symbol and the normal symbol stop symbol become a winning symbol is increased, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased.

(3) When the normal game state and the short-time state suddenly become a big hit with a probable change symbol, and when the big hit game ends, the gaming state is shifted from the normal game state and the short-time state to a positive change state. At this time, the probability that the stop symbol of the special symbol becomes a winning symbol is increased, but the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol is not increased, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is not shortened, and a variable prize is awarded. The opening time and the number of times of opening in the ball device 15 cannot be increased. It should be noted that after the sudden probability big hit game is ended, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects that the production mode is shifted to the probability variation state.

(4) When the probability change state and the probability change time short state suddenly hit a big win with the probability change symbol, and when the big hit game is finished, if the game state is the probability change state, the probability change state is continued without changing, and the game state is definitely changed. When it is in the short-time state, the state is shifted to the probability variation state. At this time, the probability that the stop symbol of the special symbol becomes a winning symbol is increased, but the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol is not increased, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is not shortened, and a variable prize is awarded. The opening time and the number of times of opening in the ball device 15 cannot be increased. In addition, after the sudden probability big hit game is ended, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects that the production mode is shifted to the probability variation state.

(5) A big hit is made with a non-probable variation in the normal game state and the short-time state, and when the big-hit game is ended, the short-time state is controlled by a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) after the big hit. That is, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the transition from the normal gaming state to the short-time state is made a predetermined number of times of variation, and when the gaming state is the short-time state, the short-time state is continued for a predetermined number of times of variation. At this time, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are increased. Then, when the change of the predetermined number of changes is started, the gaming state is shifted from the short-time state to the normal gaming state.

(6) When the probability change state and the probability change time short state, a big hit is made with a non-probability variable symbol, and when the big hit game ends, the time is controlled to a short time state by a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) after the big hit ends. In other words, the state is shifted from the probability variation state and the probability variation short time state to the short time state by a predetermined number of fluctuations. At this time, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are increased. Then, when the change of the predetermined number of changes is started, the gaming state is shifted from the short-time state to the normal gaming state.

(7) In the normal gaming state and the probability change state, the small hit symbol is a small hit, and when the small hit game ends, the normal gaming state and the probability change state are continued without change. In addition, after the end of the small hit game, the effect mode is changed to the effect mode (chance mode) that expects that the effect mode has been shifted to the probability change state.

(8) When the time-short state and the probability change time short state, the small hit symbol is a small hit, and when the small hit game ends, the time-short state and the probability change time short state are continued without change. In addition, after the end of the small hit game, the effect mode is changed to the effect mode (chance mode) that expects that the effect mode has been shifted to the probability change state.

  Note that the gaming state transition as described above is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to such a configuration.

  Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an arrangement pattern of reach symbols. As shown in FIG. 3, the variable display device 9 is divided into left, middle and right display areas. Then, three consecutive frames of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the display area of each column. Therefore, the decorative display of 3 rows × 3 columns (= 9 symbols) is stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9 and is visually recognized by the player.

  In the variable display device 9, the left, middle and right decorative symbols are variably displayed, and the combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols (except for the symbol “*”) derived and displayed thereafter is displayed on the active line. When you have the same design, you win a big hit. In this embodiment, five lines of “upper stage”, “middle stage”, “lower stage”, “lower right” and “upward right” are provided as effective lines.

  In this embodiment, reach is established when the left symbol and the right symbol (excluding the symbol “*”) are aligned on the same effective line. For example, as shown in FIG. 3, when the left symbol and the right symbol are aligned with the same symbol “1” in the upper line (“1UH”), the left symbol and the right symbol are the same symbol “1” in the lower line. When aligned (“1LH”), when the left symbol and right symbol are aligned with the same symbol “1” in the middle line (“1CH”), when the left symbol and right symbol are double lines (lower right and up right) When the same symbols “1” and “8” are aligned (“1WH”), reach is established.

  The symbols (1UH, 1LH, etc.) attached to each reach symbol indicate the symbol number (“1”, “2”, “3”...), And the second digit indicates a line (“ “Upper stage”, “middle stage”, “lower stage”, “double line”), and the first digit “H” indicates a state of “Hazure”. In the second-digit line display, “U” is an abbreviation for “upper” Upper, “C” is an abbreviation for “middle” Center, “L” is an abbreviation for “lower” Lower, “W” indicates “double line”. For example, “7CH” means that the symbol is “7”, “middle line”, and “out”.

  In this embodiment, when reach is established, an effect different from normal is performed with a lamp or sound. The effect and the reach display mode in the variable display device 9 are called reach effects. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (decoration design etc.)) or a background display mode (for example, color) of the variable display device 9 is displayed. May be changed.

  Next, the correspondence relationship between the stop symbol of the special symbol and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (the outlier symbol of both symbols, the probability variation symbol, the non-probability variation symbol, the sudden probability variation symbol, and the small hit symbol symbol) will be described.

(1) Special design stop design:
As described above, the special symbols variably displayed on the special symbol display 8 are “0” to “9”. Among these, “0” to “3”, “8”, “9” are outliers, “7” is a probability variable symbol, “6” is a non-probability variable symbol, and “5” is a sudden probability variable symbol. “4” is a small hit symbol.

(2) Decorative design stop design:
As described above, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the symbols “1”, “*”, “2”, and “*”, respectively.

(2-1) A decorative pattern is a pattern in which the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns is not aligned on the same effective line on all active lines (for example, “358”, etc .: a sudden probability change described later) Excluding symbols and small hit symbols). Note that although the left and right decorative symbols are aligned on the effective line with the same symbol (although it is a reach), the state where only the central decorative symbol is not aligned on the effective line is also an outlier.

(2-2) A big hit symbol of a decorative symbol is a symbol in a state in which a combination of left, middle and right decorative symbols is aligned on the same effective line on a predetermined effective line. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an arrangement pattern of jackpot symbols. As shown in FIG. 4, the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols (excluding the symbol “*”) is aligned on the same line on the active line. For example, as shown in FIG. 4, when the combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is aligned with the same symbol “1” in the upper line (“1UF”), the left middle right decorative symbol combination is in the lower line. When the same symbol “1” is aligned (“1LF”), when the combination of the left middle right decorative symbol is aligned with the same symbol “1” in the middle line (“1CF”), the left middle right decorative symbol When the combination is aligned with the same symbol “1” in the line that descends to the right (“1SF”), and when the combination of the left and right decorative symbols is aligned with the same symbol “1” in the line that rises to the right (“1AF”) ), A big hit.

  The symbol (1UF, 1LF, etc.) attached to each jackpot symbol is the symbol number (“1” “2” “3”...) In the third digit, and the second digit is a line display (“ “Upper stage”, “middle stage”, “lower stage”, “lower right”, “upward right”), and the first digit “F” indicates a “big hit” (Fever) state. In the second-digit line display, “U” is an abbreviation for “upper” Upper, “C” is an abbreviation for “middle” Center, “L” is an abbreviation for “lower” Lower, “S” is an acronym for “downward right” SAGARI, and “A” is an acronym for “upward right” AGARI. For example, “7AF” means that the symbol is “7”, “rising line to the right”, and “big hit”.

  Among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. 4, there are symbols in a state where the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is aligned with specific symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “8”) on the active line. It is a probable variation. Specifically, in FIG. 4, “1UF” “1LF” “1CF” “1SF” “1AF”, “3UF” “3LF” “3CF” “3SF” “3AF”, “5UF” “5LF” “5CF” The symbols “5SF”, “5AF”, “7UF”, “7LF”, “7CF”, “7SF”, “7AF”, “8UF”, “8LF”, “8CF”, “8SF” and “8AF” are probabilistic symbols. In addition, among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. 4, the symbols in the state in which the combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols are aligned with the symbols other than the specific symbols (“2”, “4”, “6”) on the active line are not. It is a probable variation. Specifically, in FIG. 4, "2UF" "2LF" "2CF" "2SF" "2AF", "4UF" "4LF" "4CF" "4SF" "4AF", "6UF" "6LF" "6CF" The symbols “6SF” and “6AF” are non-probable variations.

  In this embodiment, when the lottery effect after the big hit is performed, the stop symbol derived and displayed when the fluctuation is stopped does not correspond to the special symbol and the decorative symbol. For example, even if the stop symbol of the special symbol derived and displayed at the time of fluctuation stop is the probability variation symbol “7”, when the re-lottery effect is executed after the big hit, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol derived and displayed at the time of fluctuation stop Becomes an uncertain variable “2UF” or the like. In this case, the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed as a stop symbol of the ornament symbol in the re-lottery effect after the big hit.

(2-3) In this embodiment, in order to notify the player that there is a high probability of being a big hit or a big hit, there is a decorative pattern in the middle left and right in the middle of the variation of the decorative design. The effect of stopping and displaying the special combination of is executed. Such a special combination of left, middle, and right decorative patterns is called a chance for production. In this embodiment, a chance eye A and a chance eye B are provided as chance eyes in the production.

  As shown in FIG. 5, 40 types of chance items (“1C” to 40C ”) are provided as the chance items A. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, as the chance item B, 32 types of chance items (“41C” to “72C”) are provided. Note that the symbol (C) attached to each chance is an abbreviation of “Chance”. When the chance item A on the performance shown in FIG. 5 is stopped and displayed, it subsequently develops to super reach. Further, when the chance item B in the production shown in FIG. 6 is stopped and displayed, it subsequently becomes super reach or a big hit without being developed to reach. Therefore, the player expects a big hit when the chances A and B are stopped and displayed.

  When a missing symbol is determined, the determined missing symbol may accidentally become a chance eye A or a chance eye B. In this case, if the chance item A or the chance item B is derived and displayed, the player may misunderstand that the player will develop into a super reach even though it does not develop into a super reach (high possibility of a big hit). . In order to avoid such misunderstandings, in this embodiment, control for prohibiting derivation and display of the same symbol as the chance eye A or chance eye B as a symbol is executed.

(2-4) Suddenly probabilistic symbols of decorative symbols are specific symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “8”) in which the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is different on the middle line. It is a symbol in a state stopped and displayed at. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, 10 kinds of symbols (designs surrounded by a thick frame: “73C” “78C” “113C” “118C” “123C” “128C” “ 133C "," 138C "," 143C "," 148C "). Specifically, “135” “571” “185” “318” “387” “578” “753” “783” “835” “873” is stopped and displayed suddenly on the middle line. It is a probable variation. In addition, the suddenly probable pattern is also called a chance chance for sudden use.

  The sudden probability variation symbol is a kind of jackpot symbol, but it is desirable not to easily recognize the occurrence of the jackpot by the sudden probability variation symbol in order to make it appear that it has suddenly shifted to the probability variation state. For this reason, as described above, the suddenly probable symbols are different from the other jackpot symbols.

  When a missing symbol is determined, it may happen that the determined missing symbol suddenly suddenly becomes a probabilistic symbol. In this case, if the probability variation pattern is suddenly derived and displayed, the player may be misunderstood that the state has been shifted to the probability variation state without being shifted to the probability variation state. In order to avoid such misunderstandings, in this embodiment, a control is executed that prohibits suddenly derivation and display of the same symbol as the probability variation symbol as a symbol.

  In FIG. 7, symbols other than the sudden probability variation symbols (“74C” to “77C” and the like; hereinafter referred to as “probability similar symbols”) are also shown. These suddenly similar symbols have the same sequence (combination) of numbers and combinations of numbers, but are stopped and displayed on a line different from the line on which the suddenly changed symbols are stopped. That is, in the example of “135”, the suddenly probable symbols are stopped and displayed on the middle line, but the suddenly similar symbols are stopped and displayed on the upper and lower lines. Since such a symbol suddenly resembles a probabilistic variation symbol, if it is derived and displayed as an outlier symbol, there is a risk of misleading the player that the probabilistic variation symbol has been derived and displayed. For this reason, as in the case of the sudden probability variation symbol, a control is executed to prohibit the derivation and display of the sudden similarity symbol as a symbol.

(2-5) In the same manner as the sudden probability variation design, the small hit design of the decorative design is also a specific design (“1” “3” “5” in which the combination of the left middle right decorative design is different on the middle line. "7" and "8"). However, the small hit design is different from the probability variation design and the arrangement (combination) of numbers. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, 10 types of symbols (designs surrounded by a thick frame: “83C” “88C” “153C” “158C” “163C” “168C” “ 173C "," 178C "," 183C "," 188C "). Specifically, the symbols in the state where “531” “175” “317” “357” “378” “518” “713” “815” “853” “875” are stopped and displayed on the middle line are small. It is a winning symbol. A small hit symbol is also called a chance for a small hit.

  In this way, since the small hit symbol of the decorative symbol is a symbol that resembles the suddenly probable symbol, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the sudden big odd hit or the small hit has occurred from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. become. In addition, as described above, since the same special performance (except for the performance only for sudden accuracy) is executed in the sudden odd change big hit state and the small hit state, the player suddenly has a probable big hit from the content of the production. It will not be possible to recognize whether it has occurred or a small hit has occurred. In addition, if the game is controlled to either the probability variation state or the normal game state after the sudden probability big hit or small hit, the variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is shortened in both the probability variation state and the normal game state. In addition, since the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are not improved and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is not shortened, the player cannot recognize to which state the gaming state has been changed. Therefore, the expectation for the transition to the probability change state by the player can be maintained after the sudden probability big hit or small hit ends. As for the special symbols, the sudden probability variation symbol is “5” and the small hit symbol is “4”, which are different symbols.

  When the missing symbol is determined, the determined missing symbol may accidentally become a small hit symbol. In this case, if the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that the probability change may have suddenly occurred (the player may have shifted to the probability change state). In order to avoid such a misunderstanding, in this embodiment, a control is executed to prohibit the same symbol as the small hit symbol from being derived and displayed as a symbol.

  FIG. 8 also shows symbols other than the small hit symbol (such as “84C” to “87C”; hereinafter referred to as “small hit similar symbol”). These small hit similar symbols have the same arrangement (combination) of small hit symbols and numbers, but are stopped and displayed on a line different from the line on which the small hit symbols are stopped. That is, in the example of “531”, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line, but the small hit similar symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper and lower lines. Since such a symbol is similar to the small hit symbol, if it is derived and displayed as an outlier symbol, the player may misunderstand that the sudden probability variation symbol similar to the small hit symbol is derived and displayed. For this reason, as in the case of the small hit symbol, control for prohibiting the derivation and display of the small hit similar symbol as the symbol is executed.

  FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration in the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 9 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A basic circuit (corresponding to game control means) 53 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The basic circuit 53 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, and a game control microcomputer 560 having a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program. , I / O port unit 57. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. Further, the I / O port unit 57 may be incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 also includes an I / O port unit.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, hereinafter, the game control microcomputer 560 executes (or performs processing) specifically. Is that the CPU 56 executes control according to the program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31. The game control means is realized by a basic circuit 53 including a game control microcomputer 560.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for providing the basic circuit 53 with detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a is also mounted on the main board 31 and is specially variable. A solenoid circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21 for opening / closing the winning device (opening / closing plate 20) and the solenoid 16 for opening / closing the variable winning ball device 15 according to a command from the basic circuit 53 is also mounted on the main board 31 and is used for game control when the power is turned on. In accordance with data provided from a system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the microcomputer 560 and the basic circuit 53, an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state is sent to an external device such as a hall computer. Information output circuit 64 is also mounted on main board 31 It has been.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 performs display control of the special symbol display 8 that variably displays the special symbol, and also performs display control of the normal symbol display 10 that variably displays the normal symbol. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 controls the display state of the special symbol hold storage display 18 and also controls the display state of the normal symbol hold storage display 41.

  The hitting ball launching device that hits and launches the game ball launches the game ball toward the game area 7 as the launch motor 94 rotates. A power signal for driving the firing motor 94 is supplied to the firing motor 94 via the touch sensor substrate 90 from a power source mounted on a power supply board (not shown). A connection signal (VL signal) is input from the card unit 50 to the touch sensor substrate 90 via the interface substrate 66. Further, the touching of the operation knob (hitting ball handle) 5 by the player is detected by a touch sensor mounted on the touch sensor substrate 90. Then, the detection signal from the touch sensor and the signal from the power source are input to one AND circuit on the touch sensor substrate 90, and the output signal of the one AND circuit and the VL signal from the card unit 50 are the touch sensor substrate. 90 is input to another AND circuit, and a signal is output from the other AND circuit to the firing motor 94. Therefore, when the detection signal is not output from the touch sensor because the VL signal from the card unit 50 is not output to the touch sensor substrate 90 or the player does not touch the operation knob 5, the firing motor 94 Driving is stopped.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The display control of the variable display device 9 that receives and variably displays the decorative design is performed.

  FIG. 10 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 10, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 has an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 100 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and a strobe signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77. In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the variable display device 9 using the LCD based on the effect control command.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 allows the signal input from the relay board 77 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit is installed. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 10 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the input / output port 105. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound number data to the sound output board 70 via the input / output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input / output driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, it is supplied to a decorative lamp 25 provided on the frame side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input / output driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  The signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are transmitted bidirectionally between the effect control microcomputer 100, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 (a response signal is transmitted from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side). Communication).

  The effect control microcomputer 100 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM stores character image data that is frequently used among images displayed on the variable display device 9, specifically, people, characters, figures, symbols, and the like (including decorative designs). Is. The effect control microcomputer 100 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 executes display control of the variable display device 9 based on the data input from the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the variable display device 9 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100 and maps the VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the variable display device 9.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by game control means (game control microcomputer 560: CPU 56 and peripheral circuits such as ROM 54 and RAM 55) on the main board 31. When power is turned on to the gaming machine and the input level of the reset terminal becomes high level, the gaming control microcomputer 560 starts main processing after step S1. In the main process, the game control microcomputer 560 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). Then, the built-in device register is initialized (step S4). Further, after initialization (step S5) of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits), the RAM is set to an accessible state (step S6). The interrupt mode 2 is an address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the game control microcomputer 560 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device. Is a mode indicating an interrupt address.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the state of the output signal of a clear switch (not shown) input via the input port only once (step S7). When ON is detected in the confirmation, the game control microcomputer 560 executes normal initialization processing (steps S11 to S14).

  If the clear switch is not in the on state, whether or not data protection processing (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) of the backup RAM area of the RAM 55 has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (Step S8). If it is confirmed that such a protection process is not performed, the game control microcomputer 560 executes an initialization process. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process. In this example, if “55H” is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is a backup (ON state), and if a value other than “55H” is set, it means that there is no backup (OFF state).

  When it is confirmed that there is a backup, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S9). In step S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the game control microcomputer 560 returns the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Is performed (step S10). Then, the saved value of the PC (program counter) saved in the backup RAM area is set in the PC, and the address is restored.

  In the initialization process, the game control microcomputer 560 first performs a RAM clear process (step S11). In addition, control of a predetermined work area (for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a special symbol process flag, a payout command storage pointer, a winning ball flag, a ball out flag, a payout stop flag, etc. A work area setting process for setting an initial value to a flag for selectively performing processing according to the state is performed (step S12). Further, a process of transmitting an initialization command for initializing the sub-boards (the payout control board 37 and the effect control board 80 in this embodiment) to each sub-board is executed (step S13). Examples of the initialization command include a command indicating an initial design of a decorative design displayed on the variable display device 9.

  Then, the CTC register provided in the game control microcomputer 560 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every 2 ms (step S14). That is, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S11 to S14) is completed, the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) are repeatedly executed in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. (Step S19). The display random number is a random number for determining a special symbol losing symbol displayed on the special symbol display 8 or a random number for determining a pattern variation pattern. The display random number update process is a display random number. This is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for use. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining an initial value of a count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a big hit determination random number generation counter). In a game control process described later, when the count value of the jackpot determination random number generation counter makes one round, an initial value is set in the counter.

  Note that when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt is prohibited. The display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are also executed in the timer interrupt process described later. This is to avoid competing with the processing in the timer interrupt processing. That is, a timer interrupt is generated during the processing of step S17 or step S18, and the counter value for generating the display random number during the timer interrupt processing or the counter value for generating the initial value random number If updated, the continuity of the count value may be impaired. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt disabled state is set during the processes of steps S17 and S18.

  Next, the game control process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When the timer interrupt occurs during the execution of the main process, specifically, in the period when the interrupt is permitted during the execution of the loop process of Steps S16 to S19, the game control microcomputer 560 displays FIG. The timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S37 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not an on-state has been turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off process, when it is detected that the power-off signal is output, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a power supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, and the state determination is performed (switch processing: Step S21).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 controls the display of the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, the special symbol hold memory indicator 18, the normal symbol hold memory indicator 41, and a status indicator (not shown). A display control process is performed (step S22). For the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, and the status indicator, control for outputting a drive signal to each indicator is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S34 to S36.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a big hit determination random number used for game control (determination random number update process: step) S23). The game control microcomputer 560 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: step S24, S25).

Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Decide whether or not to generate a big hit (and whether or not to generate a big hit) (for big hit determination)
(2) Random 2: Determine the type of jackpot (for determining the jackpot type)
(3) Random 3: Determine the special symbol's off symbol (for determining off symbol)
(4) Random 4: Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol (for variation pattern determination) (5) Random 5: Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for determination per normal symbol)
(6) Random 6: Determine the initial value of random 1 (for determining the random 1 initial value)
(7) Random 7: Determine the initial value of random 5 (for determining the random 5 initial value)

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 12, the game control microcomputer 560 uses (1) a big hit determination random number, (2) a big hit type determination random number, and (5) a normal symbol determination determination. A counter for generating a random number is incremented (added by 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. In order to enhance the game effect, random numbers other than the random numbers (1) to (7) are also used.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a special symbol process (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special variable winning device (large winning a prize port) in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state.

  The game control microcomputer 560 performs normal symbol process processing (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. By executing the normal symbol process, the display control of the normal symbol display 10 and the opening / closing control of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are executed.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a process of sending an effect control command or the like related to display control of the decorative symbols in the variable display device 9 (decorative symbol command control processing: step S28).

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a (step). S30). Specifically, the payout control mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on any of the start opening switch 14a, the count switch 23 and the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. A payout control command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a test terminal process which is a process for generating and outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the game machine to be confirmed outside the game machine (step S31). Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a drive command is issued to the solenoid circuit 59 (step S32: output process). The solenoid circuit 59 drives the solenoids 16 and 21 in accordance with a drive command in order to open the variable winning ball device 15 or the opening / closing plate 20 in the open state or the closed state.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the number of reserved storage (step S33).

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. A control process is performed (step S34). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the game control microcomputer 560 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a special symbol variable display on the special symbol display 8 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the normal symbol display control data for displaying the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data. A control process is performed (step S35). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may change every time 0.2 seconds elapses if the normal symbol fluctuation speed is such that the display state (“◯” and “×”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a normal symbol effect display on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a state display lamp display process for setting the state display control data for displaying the state display lamp in accordance with the game state in the output buffer for setting the state display control data (step). S36). The game control microcomputer 560 executes the display of the status indicator lamp by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S37), and the process ends.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S36 in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the special symbol display 8 is executed.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 performs the special symbol process, if the start opening switch 14a for detecting that a game ball has won the start winning opening 14 provided in the game board 6 is turned on. That is, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the start winning opening 14 has occurred (step S311), it is confirmed whether the reserved memory number (start winning memory number) has reached the upper limit value (held memory number = 4). (Step S312).

  When the number of reserved memories has not reached the upper limit (N in step S312), the game control microcomputer 560 extracts software random numbers (such as the value of a counter for generating a jackpot determination random number), and extracts them. Is stored in the storage area in the reserved storage buffer corresponding to the value of the reserved storage number counter as the extracted random number value (step S313). Extracting a random number means reading a count value from a counter for generating a random number and setting the read count value as a random value. In step S313, random 1 to random 4 are extracted from the above random numbers. In the reserved storage buffer, the same number of storage areas as the upper limit value of the reserved storage number are secured. Further, a counter for generating a jackpot determination random number and the like and a holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 increments the value of the reserved memory counter indicating the number of reserved memories by 1 (step S314). Although not shown in FIG. 13, when the value of the pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, the start prize memory designation command (the start prize memory designation command at this time is the start prize memory number when the start prize is generated). Is a command indicating that +1 has been added). Thereafter, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag).

  Special symbol normal process (step S300): When the microcomputer 560 for game control is in a state where variable symbol special display can be started, the number of numerical data stored in the reserved memory buffer (the number of reserved memories) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the hold storage counter. If the count value of the holding storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit (whether or not the display result of the special symbol variable display is the specific display result). In the case of a big hit, the big hit flag is set and the type of big hit (non-probable big hit, probable big hit, sudden probable big hit, etc.) is determined. If it is not a big hit, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit. In the case of a small hit, a small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S301.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): For determining a variation pattern that is extracted when a variation pattern of variable display of a special symbol (effect mode during symbol variation: variation time is also specified by the variation pattern) is generated at the time of start winning. Selection is made from a plurality of types of variation patterns determined in advance according to the value of a random number (one of display random numbers). Further, based on the determined variation pattern, after setting the variable display time (variation time) until the special symbol is variably displayed and derived and displayed in the special symbol process timer, the special symbol process timer is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S302.

  Special symbol changing process (step S302): When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the special symbol process timer set in step S301 times out), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is changed. The value is updated according to step S303.

  Special symbol stop process (step S303): The variable symbol display on the special symbol indicator 8 is stopped and the stop symbol is displayed. In addition, an effect control command (decorative symbol stop designation command) for designating the stop of variable display of the decorative symbols on the variable display device 9 is transmitted to the effect control board 80. If the jackpot flag is set, the time from when the jackpot symbol is stopped until the jackpot game starts (the jackpot display time) is set in the jackpot control timer, and then the jackpot control timer is started. Let In addition, the effect control board 80 is provided with an effect control command (fanfare command) for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to execute a signal effect (fanfare effect) indicating that the jackpot game is started after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. Send. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S304. When the small hit flag is set, after setting the time from the stop display of the small hit symbol to the start of the small hit game (small hit display time) in the big prize control timer, Start the control timer. In addition, a special effect in the small hit game after the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed (2 round effect; the 2 round effect is an effect that is executed when a sudden sudden change big hit occurs (excluding the direct effect) The effect control command (fanfare command) for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to execute the effect) is transmitted to the effect control board 80. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S308. When the big hit flag and the small hit flag are not set, the internal state is updated to a value according to step S300.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S304): When the big hit display time has elapsed, control for opening the large winning opening is started. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable prize-winning device to open the big prize opening. The number of rounds is counted by a counter. Also, the execution time (round time) of the special winning opening control process is set in the special winning opening control timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305.

  Processing for opening a special prize opening (step S305): A process for confirming the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. When the closing condition for the big prize opening is established, the solenoid 21 is driven to close the special winning prize opening by closing the special variable prize winning device. In addition, the time (interval time) from the end of the round to the start of the next round is set in the big prize opening control timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S306.

  Post-winner opening process (step S306): When the interval time has elapsed, it is confirmed whether there is a remaining round. If there are remaining rounds, control to open the big prize opening is started. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable prize-winning device to open the big prize opening. The number of rounds is counted by a counter. Also, the execution time (round time) of the special winning opening control process is set in the special winning opening control timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305. On the other hand, when all rounds are finished, an effect control command (ending command) for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform an effect (ending effect) for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is issued. After transmitting to the effect control board 80 and setting the execution time of the big hit end process (big hit end time) in the big prize opening control timer, the internal state is updated to a value according to step S307.

  Big hit end process (step S307): A predetermined flag set / reset process for ending the big hit gaming state is performed. Then, the internal state is updated to a value corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): When the small hit display time or interval time has elapsed, it is checked whether there is a remaining round. If there are remaining rounds, control to open the big prize opening is started. Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable prize-winning device to open the big prize opening. The number of rounds is counted by a counter. In addition, the execution time (round time) of the small hit release process is set in the big prize opening control timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value according to step S309. On the other hand, when all the rounds are finished, after setting the execution time of the small hit end process (small hit end time) in the big winning opening control timer, the internal state is updated to a value according to step S310.

  Opening process for small hits (step S309): A process for confirming the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition for the big prize opening is established, the solenoid 21 is driven to close the special winning prize opening by closing the special variable prize winning device. Then, the time (interval time) from the end of the round to the start of the next round is set in the big prize opening control timer, and the internal state is updated to a value according to step S308.

  Small hit end process (step S310): A predetermined flag set / reset process for ending the small hit gaming state is performed. Then, the internal state is updated to a value corresponding to step S300.

  15 and 16 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control board 80. In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration. The first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In the example shown in FIG. 15, commands 8000 (H) to 806 A (H) are effect control commands (variation) for designating a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the variable display device 9 in response to variable display of special symbols. Pattern command). The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation.

  Commands 8C00 (H) to 8C06 (H) are effect control commands for designating the contents of the stop symbols (display results) of the decorative symbols in the variable display device 9. In this embodiment, commands 8C00 (H) to 8C06 (H) are referred to as symbol information designation commands.

  The command 8C00 (H) is an effect control command (outgoing designation command) for designating that the stop symbol (display result) of the special symbol is determined as the offcoming symbol. Command 8C01 (H) is an effect control command (ordinary big hit designation command) that designates that the stop symbol of the special symbol has been decided as a non-probable variation symbol (that is, a non-probability variation big hit (also referred to as a normal big hit)). ).

  The command 8C02 (H) is an effect control command (designated to specify that the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be a probable variation symbol (that is, a probable variation big hit is determined), and that it is determined not to execute the re-lottery effect after the big hit game starts. 1 specified command per probability variation. Command 8C03 (H) is an effect control command (probability variable big hit 2 designation command) that designates that the stop symbol of the special symbol is decided as the probability varying symbol and that it is decided to execute the re-lottery effect during the big hit game. Command 8C04 (H) is an effect control command (probability variable big hit) that designates that the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be a probable variable symbol and that it is determined to execute the re-lottery effect after the big hit game is finished (during the ending effect) 3 designation command).

  Command 8C05 (H) is an effect control command (suddenly probable big hit designation command) for designating that the stop symbol of the special symbol has been suddenly determined to be a probable change symbol (that is, that it has been determined to be suddenly probable big hit). The command 8C06 (H) is an effect control command (small hit designation command) that designates that the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined as the small hit symbol (that is, determined as the small hit symbol).

  Here, the “re-lottery effect” refers to an effect that makes it appear that the jackpot symbol is re-lotted and displayed after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9. Specifically, when it is determined in advance that the jackpot symbol (non-probability variable symbol or probability variable symbol) is derived and displayed on the variable display device 9, the left, right and right decorative symbols are the same in the variable display device 9. This is an effect of deriving and displaying a jackpot symbol (non-probability variation symbol or probability variation symbol) after stopping and displaying the non-probability variation symbol and then changing the non-probability variation symbol again (see FIG. 115). The re-lottery effect includes a case where a non-probable variable symbol is promoted to a probable variable symbol (when a non-probable variable symbol is displayed after being stopped), and a case where a non-probable variable symbol is not promoted to a probable variable symbol (a non-probable variable symbol is displayed) When the non-probable variation symbol is derived and displayed again after the stop display. The re-lottery effect that promotes a non-probable variable symbol to a probabilistic symbol is called “promotion effect” or “rising effect”.

  In this embodiment, the timing for executing the re-drawing effect is “during symbol change”, “during big hit game”, “after big hit game is over”. When the game control microcomputer 560 causes the effect control microcomputer 100 to execute a re-lottery effect during “change in design”, the game control microcomputer 560 specifies execution of the re-lottery effect with a change pattern command. In addition, when the game control microcomputer 560 causes the production control microcomputer 100 to execute the re-lottery effect “during the big hit game” or “after the big hit game is finished”, the “in jackpot game” is executed by the symbol information designation command. Alternatively, the execution of the re-drawing effect “after the end of the big hit game” is designated. The effect control microcomputer 100 executes the re-lottery effect at a predetermined timing based on the contents of the variation pattern command or the symbol information designation command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (decorative symbol stop designation command) for designating stop of variable display (fluctuation) of decorative symbols on the variable display device 9.

  Commands 9500 (H) to 9503 (H) are effect control commands (background designation commands) for designating background display according to the gaming state in the variable display device 9. Command 9500 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the variable display device 9 is in the normal gaming state. The command 9501 (H) is an effect control command (high probability state background designation command) for designating background display when the variable display device 9 is in the probability variation state (high probability state). The command 9502 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state background designation command) for designating background display when the variable display device 9 is in the time-short state. The command 9503 (H) is an effect control command (chance state background designation command) for designating background display when the variable display device 9 is in the chance mode state. The chance mode is an effect mode in which an expectation for the transition to the probability change state is given after the sudden probability big hit and the small hit end.

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating display at the customer waiting demonstration.

  In the example shown in FIG. 16, commands A000 (H) to A004 (H) are effect control commands (fanfare designation commands) for designating that a big hit game is started. Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 1 designation command) that designates the start of a big hit when a normal big hit (non-probable big hit) is determined. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 2 designation command) that designates the start of a big hit when it is determined that the probability variation big hit is determined and the re-lottery effect is not executed after the big hit game is started. Command A002 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 3 designation command) that designates the start of a big hit when it is determined that a probability variation big hit is determined and a re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit game. Command A003 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 4 designation command) that designates the start of a jackpot when it is decided that a re-lottery effect is to be executed after the jackpot game is determined and the re-lottery effect is executed after the jackpot game ends (during the ending effect) ). Command A004 (H) is an effect control command (fanfare 5 designation command) that designates the start of sudden probability variation jackpot.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command for opening a big prize opening) that designates display during a round in the 15 round jackpot game. The command A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big prize opening) that designates display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) in the 15 round big hit game. Note that the number of rounds displayed in “XX” is set.

  Commands A301 (H) to A305 (H) are effect control commands (ending designation commands) that designate the end of the big hit game. The command A301 (H) is an effect control command (ending 1 designation command) for designating the end of the normal jackpot game (displaying that the game will shift to the short time state after the jackpot game is finished). Command A302 (H) is an effect control command (ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of jackpot when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is determined and the re-lottery effect is not executed after the jackpot game is started. Command A303 (H) is an effect control command (ending 3 designation command) for designating the end of the big hit when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is determined and the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit game. Command A304 (H) is an effect control command (ending 4 designation command) that is promoted to a probable variation symbol in the re-lottery effect after the end of the big hit game (during the ending effect) and designates that it will be a promising big hit. Command A 305 (H) is an effect control command (ending 5 designation command) for designating the end of sudden probability variation jackpot. Note that the command A 302 (H) and the command A 303 (H) may be a common command. In this case, the common command is an effect control command for designating the end of the jackpot when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is determined and the re-lottery effect is not to be executed after the jackpot game ends (during the ending effect). The

  Command A4XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command for opening a big prize opening) that designates display during a round in a two-round big hit game (suddenly probable big hit game). Command A5XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big prize opening) that designates display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) in the two round big hit game (suddenly probable big hit game). In “XX”, the number of rounds is set.

  Command A600 (H) is an effect control command (small hit fanfare designation command) that designates that a small hit game is started.

  The command C0XX (H) is an effect control command (start winning memory designation command) for designating the number of starting winning memories shown by XX.

  When the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31, the contents shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. Accordingly, the display state of the variable display device 9 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the sound output board 70. It should be noted that effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 15 and 16 are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. For example, when displaying the number of winning balls that is a big hit on the variable display device 9, an effect control command for designating the count number of the count switch 23 is also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

  FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a variation pattern used in this embodiment. 17 and 18, “S” of “line” indicates that single reach (any one of 1UH to 8UH, 1LH to 8LH, and 1CH to 8CH in FIG. 3) is established, and “W” of “line”. Indicates that double reach (any one of 1WH to 8WH in FIG. 3) is established, and “S & W” of “line” indicates that either single reach or double reach is established. The “normal selection table” indicates the table number of the table for determining the decorative design selected in the normal mode (a state other than the chance mode), and the “chance mode selection table” is selected in the chance mode. The table number of the decoration design determination table is shown.

  In this example, each variation pattern has a variation pattern when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is “out-of-line” (a variation pattern dedicated to the loss) and a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (the stop symbol at the time of the variable stop before the big hit) The variation pattern when the symbol becomes “non-probable variation” or “probability variation” (variation pattern for both probable big hit / normal big hit) and the stop symbol for the decorative symbol (the stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop before the big hit) are “probable variation” ”Is the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern dedicated to probability variation jackpot), and the decorative pattern stop pattern (stop pattern at the time of variation stop before big hit) is“ non-probability variation symbol ” Variation pattern), the variation pattern when the stop symbol of the decorative design is “suddenly probable variation” (variation pattern dedicated to sudden sudden variation jackpot), and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is “suddenly probabilistic variation” Or it is distinguished in the fluctuation pattern when a "Koatari symbol" (variation pattern of sudden probability variation jackpot / Koatari combined).

  As a fluctuation pattern dedicated to outliers, a fluctuation pattern of normal fluctuation without reach in the normal gaming state, a fluctuation pattern of short-time normal fluctuation without reach in the short-time state (including the short-time state of probability change), and normal reach A variation pattern with (simple reach mode), a variation pattern with super reach A, a variation pattern with super reach B, a variation pattern with super reach C, and a variation pattern with super reach D are provided. ing. There are also provided a variation pattern that develops to super reach B after the chance eye A is temporarily displayed, and a variation pattern that develops to super reach D after the chance eye B is temporarily displayed.

  Here, “normal reach” refers to the case where the middle symbol changes rapidly after the reach is established, the change rate / direction of the middle symbol changes after the reach is established, or after the reach is established. There are cases where a character appears or the background changes after reach is established. However, in the case of normal reach, the mode of production is relatively simple. On the other hand, “super reach” combines a plurality of effects of normal reach, develops from normal reach to another effect, or executes an effect with a story. In the case of super reach, an effect that makes it possible to expect a big hit than normal reach is performed. In general, the fluctuation time is set longer in the super reach than in the normal reach. It should be noted that a specific effect mode of normal reach will be described later with reference to FIGS. 96 and 110, and a specific effect mode of super reach will be described later with reference to FIGS. 97, 98, and 111 to 114.

  As a normal big hit / probable big hit combination variation pattern, a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern with super reach A, a variation pattern with super reach B, a variation pattern with super reach C, and a super reach D Variation patterns are provided. There are also provided a variation pattern that develops to super reach C after the chance eye A is temporarily displayed, and a variation pattern that evolves to super reach D after the chance eye B is temporarily displayed. In addition, when the double reach is established, the symbol that comes first (for example, “1” when the symbol “1” or “2” becomes a double reach and “1”) becomes the big hit (first hit) and the symbol that comes later ( For example, the same variation pattern is divided between the case of “2” when the double reach is achieved with the symbols “1” and “2”, and the case of a big hit (later hit). In this embodiment, the variation pattern for both the normal big hit / probable big hit is always “re-lottery” effect during the fluctuation of the symbol.

  As a variation pattern dedicated to probable big hits, a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern with super reach A, a variation pattern with super reach B, a variation pattern with super reach C, and a variation pattern with super reach D Is provided. There are also provided a variation pattern that develops to super reach C after the chance eye A is temporarily displayed, and a variation pattern that evolves to super reach D after the chance eye B is temporarily displayed. In addition, after reaching out of reach, the “relief” effect (for example, an effect in which the character is destroyed and replaced with a big hit symbol) is displayed, and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed. Is also provided. In addition, when double reach is established, the same variation pattern is divided between the case where the symbol that comes first is a big hit (first hit) and the case that is a big hit if the symbol comes later (later hit).

  As a variation pattern exclusively for big hits, a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach C are provided.

  As a variation pattern dedicated to sudden probability variation big hit, a variation pattern for executing sudden probability variation entry effect is provided. A variation pattern for executing a time mission entry effect and a variation pattern for executing a sudden probability change / small hit common entry effect are provided as a variation pattern for both sudden probability change big hit / small hit.

  Here, the “sudden probability change entry effect” is a special effect that indicates sudden change into probability change. The player can recognize that the player has entered the probability change state due to the sudden execution of the probability change entry effect. The “time mission entry effect” is a special effect indicating that a time mission (presentation where a mission is presented and a big hit is achieved when the mission is achieved within a predetermined time) is entered. The “sudden probability change / small hit common entry effect” is a special effect indicating sudden change or a small hit. The player cannot determine whether or not the state has been shifted to the probability change state only by executing the time mission entry effect or the sudden probability change / small hit common entry effect.

  In this embodiment, when the “sudden probability change entry effect” is executed, a sudden probability change pattern (an opportunity for sudden accuracy) is derived and displayed, after which the effect for 2 rounds is executed and suddenly enters the probability change. The state is shifted to a state in which the effect (a kind of effect in the chance mode) is executed. In addition, when the “time mission entry effect” is executed, a probability variation symbol or a small hit symbol (a chance item for a small hit) is suddenly derived and displayed, and then an effect during the mission presentation (a kind of effect in the chance mode) ) Is executed. In addition, when the “sudden probability change / small hit common entry effect” is executed, a sudden probability change symbol or small hit symbol is derived and displayed, and then it is impossible to determine whether the sudden probability change or small hit has occurred (chance) The mode is shifted to a state in which a kind of effect in the mode is executed.

  In this embodiment, after the mission entry effect is executed and the chance eyes (suddenly probable symbols or small hits symbols) are derived and displayed, “predetermined outcome (for example,“ 7 in the middle of the left display area ” When a mission (command) is issued in a stage during the mission, a specific reach, such as the predetermined chance shown in FIGS. When a predetermined outcome is derived and displayed in time), the player is controlled in a state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit, a transition to a probable change state, or a super reach). When the “predetermined outcome” is selected from a plurality of types as described above, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the predetermined outcome and designates it with a variation pattern command, thereby producing an effect control microcomputer. The display 100 may be configured to display (present), or the presentation control microcomputer 100 may uniquely determine and display (present) a predetermined output.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, a predetermined variation time is preset for each variation pattern, and the production control microcomputer 100 specifies the variation time together with the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command. Is possible. In addition, the second byte of EXT data in the 2-byte effect control command is assigned to each variation pattern. For example, “00 (H)” is assigned as the “EXT data” to the variation pattern of the variation number 1, and “6A (H)” is assigned to the variation pattern of the variation number 91 as the “EXT data”. The effect control microcomputer 100 recognizes the content (variation number) of the variation pattern from the “EXT data” assigned to the variation pattern command.

  19 to 21 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 can start the variation of the special symbol (when the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300, that is, the special symbol indicator If the special symbol change display is not made in step 8 and the big hit game is not being played or the small hit game is not being played (step S51), the start winning memory number (holding memory number) is confirmed (step S52). Specifically, the count value of the hold storage counter is confirmed.

  If the starting winning memory number is not 0, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the starting winning memory number = 1 is read and stored in the random number storage buffer of the RAM 55 (step S53), and the starting winning memory number 1 is reduced by 1 and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step S54). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the start winning memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the starting winning memory number = n−1.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the current game state (normal game state, probability change state, short time state, etc.) and sets the address of the background designation command transmission table corresponding to the game state to the pointer (step). S55). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a command set process (FIG. 35) described later (step S56). If the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, a normal state background designation command is transmitted. If the current gaming state is the probability variation time short state, the probability variation state background designation command is transmitted, and the current gaming state is short. If it is in a state, a time-short state background designation command is transmitted. In this embodiment, a chance state background designation command is transmitted when the mode is changed to the chance mode suddenly after the end of a game with big odds or small hits.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number from the random number storage buffer (step S57), and executes the jackpot determination processing module (step S58). The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process of comparing a jackpot determination value determined in advance with a random number value for jackpot determination and determining that the jackpot determination value is a jackpot if they match. Here, in the jackpot determination, when the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state, probability change short state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal game state and short time state). It is comprised so that it may become. Specifically, a high-probability jackpot determination table in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance and a low-probability jackpot determination table in which the number of jackpot determination values is set smaller than the high-probability jackpot determination table are provided. Keep it. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state. If the gaming state is a high probability state, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the high probability jackpot determination table to perform the jackpot determination process. If the gaming state is a low probability state, a big hit determination process is performed using a low probability big hit determination table. With such a configuration, the probability of a big hit is higher in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

  Whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state and probability variation time short state) is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag indicating that the game state is the probability variation state and the probability variation time short state is set. Is done.

  22 (A) and 22 (B) show the distribution ratios of the determination values in the jackpot determination table in this embodiment. FIG. 22 (A) shows the distribution ratio of the judgment value in the jackpot judgment table in the low probability state (normal game state and short time state), and FIG. 22 (B) shows the high probability state (probability variation state, probability variation short time state). The distribution ratio of the judgment value in the jackpot judgment table at the time is shown. As shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B, in this embodiment, the number of jackpot determination random numbers is 65536. That is, the range of the random number value for jackpot determination is 0 to 65535. The number of jackpot determination values at the low probability is 164, and the jackpot probability at the low probability is 0.00250 (1 / 399.6). The number of jackpot determination values at the time of high probability is 1640, which is 10 times the number of jackpot determination values at the time of low probability, and the jackpot probability at high probability is 0.02502 (1 / 40.0).

  If it is determined in the big hit determination module that the big hit is not made (N in step S59), the game control microcomputer 560 proceeds to the process in step S64 in FIG.

  When it is determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination module (Y in step S59), a big hit flag is set (step S60). The game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot type determination random number from the random number storage buffer (step S61), and hits the jackpot type (normal jackpot, probability variable jackpot, probability variable jackpot, jackpot that executes the re-lottery effect during the jackpot game. After the game is over, a process of determining a probability variation big hit for executing a re-lottery effect or a sudden probability variation big hit) is executed (step S62).

  The jackpot type determination process is performed using a jackpot type determination table. In the jackpot type determination table, as shown in FIG. 22 (C), a predetermined number of jackpot type determination random numbers are assigned in advance for each jackpot type. Specifically, the number of random numbers for determining the jackpot type is 100 (that is, the range of the random value for determining the jackpot type is 0 to 99), of which 0 to 31 is assigned to “normal”, and 32 to 74 are assigned. “Probability change 1” is assigned, 75 to 81 are assigned to “probability change 2”, 82 to 96 are assigned to “probability change 3”, and 97 to 99 are assigned to “probability”. Here, “normal” indicates a normal jackpot, “probability variation 1” indicates a probability variation jackpot (no re-lottery effect), “probability variation 2” indicates a probability variation jackpot (execution of a re-lottery effect during the jackpot), and “probability variation 3”. "" Indicates a probable big hit (execution of the redrawing effect at the ending), and "surprise" suddenly shows a probable big hit. In FIG. 22 (C), the numbers (0.0008 and the like) shown below represent the rate (probability) that each jackpot type occurs in one start prize (fluctuation). The game control microcomputer 560 determines the big hit type, that is, the normal big hit, the probable big hit (no redrawing effect), the probable big hit (during the big hit), depending on which range the random number for determining the big hit type read in step S61 belongs. One of re-lottery effect execution), probability variation jackpot (re-lottery effect execution at ending) and sudden probability variation jackpot is determined. In this way, by determining the big hit type, not only whether the big hit is a normal big hit, a probable big hit, or a sudden probable big hit, whether to execute a re-lottery effect (promotion effect) and what kind of re-lottery effect It is also determined whether to execute at the timing.

  The percentage of the decorative symbols that include a specific symbol (a symbol that becomes a probable big hit when aligned on the effective line) is 5/8 = 62.5%. That is, as described above, when the eight symbols of the numbers “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, and “8” are aligned on the active line, Among them, when 5 symbols of “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, and “8” are aligned on the effective line, it becomes a probable big hit. Therefore, the ratio of the specific symbols included in the decorative symbols is 5/8 = 62.5%.

  On the other hand, the probability of a probabilistic big hit (excluding sudden probable big hits) with respect to the probability of a big round of 15 rounds (15 round normal big hits and 15 rounds probable big hits), that is, “normal” “probability 1” “probability” As shown in FIG. 22 (C), the ratio at which “probability 1”, “probability 2”, and “probability 3” are determined with respect to the ratio in which “2” and “probability 3” are determined is (43 + 7 + 15) / (32 + 43 + 7 + 15) = 65 / 97≈67%. In addition, the probability that the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed when the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped with respect to the probability that the big hit symbol indicating the big hit of 15 rounds is derived and displayed when the variation of the ornament symbol is stopped, that is, “normal”, “probability variation 1”, “probability variation 2”. The ratio at which “Probability 1” is determined with respect to the ratio at which “Probability 3” is determined is (43) / (32 + 43 + 7 + 15) = 43 / 97≈44.3% as shown in FIG. is there. That is, when the big hit of 15 rounds ("normal", "probability change 1", "probability change 2", "probability change 3") is determined, when the normal big hit is determined (when "normal" is determined), A variation pattern command dedicated to normal big hit is sent, and a non-probable variation symbol is determined as a stop symbol at the time of variation stop based on that command, or a variation pattern command for both probable big hit / normal big hit is sent and normal big hit Designated symbol information designation commands are transmitted, and a non-probable variation symbol is determined as a stop symbol at the time of variation stop based on those commands. In addition, when it is decided to promote to a probable big hit in the re-draw lottery effect after the start of the big hit game (when “probable change 2” or “probable change 3” is determined), a variation pattern command dedicated to normal big hit is sent Based on the command, a non-probable variation symbol is determined as a stop symbol at the time of variation stop, or a variation pattern command for both a probable big hit / normal big hit is sent and a design with two probable big hits or three probable big hits is designated An information designation command is transmitted, and an uncertain variable symbol is determined as a stop symbol at the time of a variable stop based on those commands. On the other hand, out of the cases where 15 round big hits (“normal”, “probability change 1”, “probability change 2”, “probability change 3”) are determined, when the probability change big hit (without re-drawing effect) is determined (“probability change 1” is When it is determined), a variation pattern command dedicated to probability variation jackpot is transmitted and the probability variation symbol is determined as a stop symbol at the time of variation stop based on that command, or the variation pattern command for both probability variation big hit / normal big hit is At the same time, a symbol information designation command with one designation per probability variation is transmitted, and a probability variation symbol is determined as a stop symbol at the time of a variable stop based on these commands. In this way, except when “probability variation 1” is determined, since the non-probability variation symbol is determined as the stop symbol at the time of variation stoppage, the probability variation symbol is derived when the decoration symbol variation stop for the probability of a big hit of 15 rounds. The probability of display is (43) / (32 + 43 + 7 + 15) = 43 / 97≈44.3%.

  As described above, the proportion of specific symbols included in the decorative symbols (the proportion of specific symbols), the probability that the probability variation jackpot is determined relative to the probability of a big hit of 15 rounds (the proportion of probability variation jackpots), and 15 rounds The probability that the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed with respect to the probability that the big success symbol representing the big hit is derived and displayed is different from the probability that the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed. However, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the jackpot type regardless of the ratio of the specific symbol (step S62), and the effect control command (variation pattern command, (Design information designation command) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. Then, as will be described later, the production control microcomputer 100 is divided into jackpot types (including the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect and the execution timing of the re-lottery effect) based on the contents of the production control command from the game control microcomputer 560. The corresponding jackpot symbol is determined and displayed when the fluctuation is stopped (see steps S621 and S626). Therefore, it is possible to easily increase / decrease the ratio of a specific symbol according to the specifications of the gaming machine, change the ratio of probability variation big hit, or set a re-lottery effect after the big hit game starts.

  Although not shown in FIG. 19, there is only one special jackpot symbol depending on the jackpot type, so the jackpot symbol is automatically determined by determining the jackpot type. The Specifically, the non-probability variable symbol “6” is determined for a normal big hit (non-probable big hit), the probabilistic variable symbol “7” is determined for a probable big hit, and the sudden probable symbol “5” for a sudden probable big hit. Will be determined.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores (stores) the decorative symbol information corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step S62 in the decorative symbol information buffer (step S63), and proceeds to the processing of step S72 in FIG. .

  In step S63, after the decorative symbol information corresponding to the jackpot type is stored in the decorative symbol information buffer, the decorative symbol command control processing (step S28, FIG. 34) is executed in response to the occurrence of the timer interrupt, and the command set is set. Processing (FIG. 35) is executed, and command transmission processing (FIG. 36) is executed. Thus, a symbol information designation command (normal jackpot designation command, probability variation big hit 1 designation command, probability variation big hit 2 designation command, probability variation big hit 3 designation command, sudden probability variation big hit designation command) corresponding to the big hit type is transmitted. Detailed contents will be described later.

  In step S64 of FIG. 20, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a small hit determination module that determines whether or not to make a small hit based on the value of the big hit determination random number read in step S57 (step S64). . The small hit determination module is a program that compares the small hit determination value predetermined in the small hit determination table with the random number for determining the big hit and executes a process of determining to be a small hit if they match. .

  FIGS. 22A and 22B show the distribution ratios of the determination values in the small hit determination table according to this embodiment. FIG. 22A shows the distribution ratio of the judgment values in the small hit judgment table in the low probability state (normal game state and short time state), and FIG. 22B shows the high probability state (probability variation state, probability variation short time state). ) Shows the distribution ratio of determination values in the small hit determination table. As shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B, in this embodiment, the number of jackpot determination random numbers is 65536. That is, the range of the random number value for jackpot determination is 0 to 65535. As described above, the number of big hit determination values is 10 times higher at the time of high probability than at the time of low probability, but the number of small hit determination values is the same for both low probability and high probability. That is, the number of small hit determination values is the same 59 at both low probability and high probability. Therefore, the small hit probability is the same 0.00090 (1 / 1110.8) at the low probability and the high probability. Note that the number of small hit determination values may be increased when the probability is high, and the probability of small hit may be higher when the probability is high.

  If it is determined in the small hit determination module that the small hit is determined (Y in step S65), the decorative symbol information corresponding to the small hit is stored in the decorative symbol information buffer (step S66), and the small hit flag is set. (Step S67). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S68). Although not shown in FIG. 20, when it is determined that a small hit is made, the small hit symbol “4” is automatically determined.

  In step S66, after the decorative symbol information corresponding to the small hit is stored in the decorative symbol information buffer, the decorative symbol command control processing (step S28, FIG. 34) is executed in response to the occurrence of the timer interrupt, and the command set is set. Processing (FIG. 35) is executed, and command transmission processing (FIG. 36) is executed. Thereby, a symbol information designation command (small hit designation command) for designating the small hit is transmitted. Detailed contents will be described later.

  When it is determined in the small hit determination module that the small hit is not made (N in step S65), the game control microcomputer 560 reads the random number for symbol determination (one of the display random numbers) from the random number storage buffer. (Step S69) Based on the value of the read out design determining random number, a process of determining a special design out of design is executed (Step S70). One of the symbols “0” to “3”, “8”, and “9” is determined as the special symbol loss symbol.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the decorative symbol information corresponding to the loss in the decorative symbol information buffer (step S71). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S68).

  In step S72 of FIG. 21, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the jackpot type determined in step S62 is a probable big hit, and if it is not a probable big hit (N in step S72), the type of jackpot Without setting the flag indicating that the process proceeds to step S82.

  When the probability variation big hit is found (Y in step S72), the probability variation big hit flag indicating that the probability variation big hit occurs is set (step S73). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation jackpot is a sudden probability variation jackpot (step S74). If it is a sudden probability change big hit (Y in step S74), a sudden probability change flag indicating that a sudden probability change big hit occurs is set (step S75), and the process proceeds to step S82.

  If it is not suddenly a probable big hit (N in Step S74), it is confirmed whether or not a re-lottery effect is executed (Step S76). When the re-lottery effect is not executed (N in Step S76), the process proceeds to Step S82. When the re-lottery effect is executed (Y in Step S76), the re-drawing effect is executed. A lottery execution flag is set (step S77), and it is confirmed whether the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit (step S78). When the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit (Y in step S78), the big hit execution flag indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit is set (step S79), and the process proceeds to step S82. To do. When it is not executed during the big hit (N in Step S78), it is confirmed whether or not the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending (Step S80). When the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending (Y in step S80), an ending execution flag indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending is set (step S81), and the process proceeds to step S82. . In step S82, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S82).

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S201). When the big hit flag is set (Y in step S201), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the sudden probability change flag is set (step S202). When the sudden probability variation flag is set (Y in step S202), since sudden probability variation big hit occurs, it is determined to use the variation pattern determination table for sudden probability variation (step S203).

  In the variation pattern determination table for sudden probability variation, variation patterns (variation numbers “89” to “91”) selected at the time of the sudden probability variation big hit shown in FIG. 18 are set in advance, and a plurality of determination values are assigned to each variation pattern. Is assigned.

  When the probability change flag is not set suddenly (N in step S202), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the probability change big hit flag is set (step S204A). When the probability variation big hit flag is set (Y in step S204A), it is confirmed whether or not the re-lottery execution flag is set (step S204B). When the probability variation jackpot flag is set and the re-lottery execution flag is not set (N in step S204B), a probability variation jackpot that does not execute the re-lottery effect occurs after the big-hit game starts, so the variation pattern for probability variation jackpot It is decided to use the decision table (step S205).

  In the variation pattern determination table for probability variation big hit, variation patterns (variation numbers “20” to “84”) selected in advance for probability variation big hit shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 are set, and a plurality of variation patterns are assigned to each variation pattern. A judgment value is assigned.

  When the probability variation big hit flag is not set (N in step S204A), since a normal big hit (non-probable variation big hit) occurs, it is decided to use the normal big hit variation pattern determination table (step S206). In addition, although the probability variation jackpot flag is set, if the re-lottery execution flag is also set (Y in step S204B), a probability variation jackpot that executes the re-lottery effect after the big-hit game starts occurs. In this case, since a non-probable variation symbol is derived and displayed when the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped, it is usually necessary to select a variation pattern for jackpot. Therefore, it is decided to use the normal big hit variation pattern determination table (step S206).

  In the normal big hit variation pattern determination table, the variation patterns (variation numbers “62” to “88”) selected in the normal big hit shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 are set in advance, and a plurality of variation patterns are assigned to each variation pattern. A judgment value is assigned.

  The game control microcomputer 560 reads the variation pattern determination random number from the random number storage buffer, and based on the read variation pattern determination random number value, the sudden variation variation determination table, the variation variation determination table for probability variation big hit or normal A symbol variation pattern is determined using the big hit variation pattern determination table (step S207). Specifically, the variation pattern corresponding to the determination value that matches the variation pattern determination random value is determined as the variation pattern of the symbol to be variably displayed next. Then, the process proceeds to step S213.

  If it is determined in step S201 that the big hit flag is not set (N in step S201), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S208). When the small hit flag is set (Y in step S208), since a small hit occurs, it is decided to use the small hit variation pattern determination table (step S209).

  In the variation pattern determination table for small hits, variation patterns (variation numbers “89” and “90”) selected at the time of the small hit shown in FIG. 18 are set in advance, and a plurality of determination values are set for each variation pattern. Assigned.

  When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S208), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the time reduction flag is set (step S210). When the time reduction flag is not set (N in step S210), it is determined to use the normal time deviation variation pattern determination table used in the normal gaming state (step S211).

  In the normal time deviation variation pattern determination table, variation patterns (variation numbers “1”, “3” to “19”) selected in advance in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. A plurality of judgment values are assigned to the variation pattern.

  On the other hand, when the hour / hour flag is set (Y in step S210), it is decided to use the hour / hour deviation variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state (step S212).

  The fluctuation pattern determination table for deviation in time reduction is set in advance with the fluctuation patterns (variation numbers “2” to “19”) selected in the case of deviation in the time reduction state (including the short period in probability variation) shown in FIG. A plurality of determination values are assigned to each variation pattern.

  Then, as described above, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the variation pattern determination random number from the random number storage buffer, and based on the read variation pattern determination random number value, the small hit variation pattern determination table, normal time The variation pattern of the symbol is determined using the variation pattern determination table for deviation or the variation pattern determination table for deviation at the time reduction (step S207). Then, the process proceeds to step S213.

  In the case of the probability variation state, the variation pattern determination table for deviation is used in the normal time as in the normal gaming state, and in the case of the probability variation short state, the variation pattern for deviation in the time reduction is similar to that in the time reduction state. A variation table is determined using the determination table.

  In step S213, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the variation pattern command data corresponding to the variation pattern determined in step S207 in the variation pattern buffer (step S213). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the variation time in the special symbol process timer (step S214). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the address of the variable command transmission table in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer (step S215). In response to this processing being performed, control for transmitting the variation pattern command is executed in the decorative symbol command control processing (step S28 in FIG. 12, FIG. 34). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the variation number monitoring process (step S216).

  In the fluctuation count monitoring process, the game control microcomputer 560 is changed to a short-time state (except for the short-time state at the time of probability change) after the big hit game ends (when the short-time flag is set), a special symbol after the big hit game ends. The number of fluctuations is counted with a fluctuation number counter. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms whether or not the count value of the fluctuation count counter has reached a value indicating a predetermined fluctuation count (for example, 100) that can continue the short-time state, and the count value is the predetermined fluctuation count. When the value becomes, the hourly flag is reset. As a result, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the big hit game ends becomes a predetermined number of fluctuations, the time-shifted state is shifted to the normal gaming state.

  Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S302) (step S217).

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S302) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, first, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the special symbol process timer by -1 (step S351). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the special symbol process timer has expired (that is, whether or not the value of the special symbol process timer is 0) (step S352), and if it has not expired (N in step S352) ) And the process is terminated. If the special symbol process timer has expired (Y in step S352), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S303) (step S353).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the game control microcomputer 560 stops the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and derives and displays the stop symbol (step S361). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the decorative symbol stop designation command transmission table in the pointer (step S362), and executes the command setting process (step S363). As a result, control for transmitting a decorative symbol stop designation command is executed.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S364). If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S364), the game control microcomputer 560 stops the jackpot symbol in the jackpot control timer that measures the time for controlling the opening / closing of the jackpot. The time from the display until the big winning opening is released (a big hit display time) is set (step S365). In the jackpot display time, an effect (fanfare effect) for notifying the player that the jackpot game is started is executed.

  Note that different jackpot display times may be set for the big hit of 15 rounds and the big hit of 2 rounds. In this case, for example, the jackpot display time is 3 seconds for a big hit of 15 rounds, and the jackpot display time is 5 seconds for a big hit of two rounds.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the fanfare command transmission table corresponding to the jackpot type to the pointer (step S366), and executes the command setting process (step S367). Thereby, control for transmitting a fanfare command corresponding to the jackpot type is executed. For the big hit type, the probability change big hit flag is set, suddenly the probability change flag is set, the re-draw lotion execution flag is set, the big hit execution flag is set, or the ending execution flag is set It can be confirmed based on whether or not. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S304) (step S368).

  If the big hit flag is not set (N in step S364), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S369). If the small win flag is set (Y in step S369), the game control microcomputer 560 displays the time from when the small winning symbol is stopped displayed to the big prize opening control timer until the big prize opening is released ( The small hit display time) is set (step S370).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the small hit fanfare command transmission table in the pointer (step S371), and executes the command setting process (step S372). Thereby, control for transmitting a fanfare command for small hitting is executed. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S308) (step S373).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S369), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S374).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening in the special symbol process (step S304). In the pre-opening process for the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the big winning opening control timer by 1 (step S401), and confirms whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 ( Step S402). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S402), the processing is ended as it is. If the value of the big prize control timer is 0 (Y in step S402), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the number of big hits is 15 rounds or 2 rounds (step S403). ). If the probability variation jackpot flag is not set, or if the probability variation jackpot flag is set but suddenly the probability variation flag is not set, it can be determined that the round is a big hit of 15 rounds. When the probability variation flag is set, it can be determined that the game is a big hit of two rounds.

  If it is a big hit for 15 rounds (Y in step S403), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the command sending table for the 15 round big hits in the big prize opening opening command pointer to the pointer (step S404), and sets the command. Is executed (step S405). As a result, control for transmitting a 15-round big prize opening opening command for designating the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round) is executed. The number of rounds is recognized by checking the value of a round number counter that counts the number of rounds in the big hit game. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to drive the solenoid 21 to open the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S406). In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, and the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the RAM area corresponds to the output state of the output port in step S406. Is set in accordance with the open / close state of the solenoid to be driven. Then, the contents set in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port in the output process of step S32 are output to the output port. As a result, a drive command signal is output from the output port to the solenoid circuit 59. The solenoid circuit 59 outputs a drive signal for driving the solenoid in response to a drive command signal to drive the solenoid. Hereinafter, in the process of opening and closing the solenoid, such an operation is performed.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S407). Since the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 in step S407, in steps S404 and S405, when the value of the round number counter is 0, a command for opening the big prize opening indicating the first round is transmitted. The process of S407 may be executed before the process of step S404, and when the value of the round number counter is 1, a command for opening a big prize opening indicating the first round may be transmitted.

  In addition, the maximum time (15-round round time) that can be opened in each round of the 15 round big hits is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S408). The round time for 15 rounds is, for example, 29.5 seconds. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S414).

  When it is a big hit of two rounds in step S403 (N in step S403), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the command winning table during the big winning opening release command for the two rounds big hit in the pointer (step S409). ), Command set processing is executed (step S410). As a result, a control is executed to transmit a two-round big prize opening opening command for designating a display state corresponding to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 drives the solenoid 21 to release the special winning opening (step S411) and increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S412). Since the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 in step S412, in steps S409 and S410, when the value of the round number counter is 0, a command for opening the big prize opening indicating the first round is transmitted. The process of S412 may be executed before the process of step S409, and when the value of the round number counter is 1, a command for opening the big prize opening indicating the first round may be transmitted. In addition, the maximum time for which the big prize opening can be opened in each round in the big hit of two rounds (round time for two rounds) is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S413). The round time for 2 rounds is a short time, for example, 5 seconds. Therefore, in the big hit of two rounds, ten game balls (the maximum number of game balls that can be won) will not win the big prize opening during the round. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S414).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening process (step S305) in the special symbol process. In the special winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the special winning prize control timer by -1 (step S421). And it is confirmed whether the number of big hits is 15 rounds (whether it is a big hit of 15 rounds or a big hit of 2 rounds) (step S422).

  If it is a big hit of 15 rounds (Y in step S422), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S423). When the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S423), it is checked whether or not the game ball has won the big prize opening by checking whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on. Confirmation is made (step S424). If the count switch 23 is not turned on (N in step S424), the process is terminated as it is. If the count switch 23 is on (Y in step S424), the game control microcomputer 560 increments the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening (step S425). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S426). If the value of the winning number counter is not the predetermined number (N in step S426), the process is ended as it is.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S423) or when the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step S426), the game control microcomputer 560 is Then, the solenoid 21 is driven to control to close the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S427). Then, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (step S428).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the command transmission table after opening the big winning opening for 15 rounds big hit to the pointer (step S429), and executes the command setting process (step S430). As a result, control for transmitting a command after opening the big prize opening for 15 rounds that specifies a display state according to the number of rounds after the big prize opening is opened (after the end of the round) is executed.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a time (interval time for 15 rounds) from the end of the round to the start of the next round in the big win of 15 rounds in the big prize opening control timer ( In step S431), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening post-processing (step S306) (step S432). The interval time for 15 rounds is, for example, 5 seconds.

  If it is a big hit of two rounds (N in step S422), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the big prize control timer is 0 (step S433), and the value of the big prize control timer If is not 0 (N in step S433), the process is terminated as it is. When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S433), the solenoid 21 is driven to control to close the big prize opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S434).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the display command transmission table after the two-round big winning opening is opened to the pointer (step S435), and executes the command setting process (step S436). As a result, the control for transmitting a command after opening the big winning opening for two rounds for specifying the display state according to the number of rounds after the opening of the big winning opening (after the end of the round) is executed. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the time from the end of the round to the start of the next round (interval time for two rounds) in the big winning prize control timer (two rounds). In step S437), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening post-processing (step S306) (step S432). The interval time for 2 rounds is the same as the interval time for 15 rounds, for example, 5 seconds.

  FIG. 28 and FIG. 29 are flowcharts showing the special winning opening opening post-process (step S306) in the special symbol process. In the post-opening process for the big prize opening, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize opening control timer by -1 (step S441), and checks whether the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 or not. (Step S442). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S442), the processing is ended as it is. If the value of the big prize control timer is 0 (Y in step S442), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the number of rounds is 15 rounds (15 rounds or 2 rounds Is determined (step S443).

  If it is a big hit of 15 rounds (Y in step S443), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 15 (step S444). If the value of the round number counter is not 15 (N in Step S444), the address of the command transmission table for the 15 round round big prize opening open command transmission table is set in the pointer (Step S445), and the command setting process is executed. (Step S446). As a result, control for transmitting a 15-round big prize opening opening command for designating the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round) is executed. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 controls to open the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) by driving the solenoid 21 (step S447) and increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S448). Since the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 in step S448, the value of the round number counter indicates the number of rounds to be started next minus 1 at the time of the processing in steps S445 and S446. However, if the process of step S448 is executed before the processes of steps S445 and S446, the value of the round number counter indicates the number of rounds to be started next at the time of the processes of steps S445 and S446. Can be.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a round time for 15 rounds in the special winning opening control timer (step S449). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S450).

  If the value of the round counter is 15 (Y in step S444), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the address of the ending command transmission table corresponding to the jackpot type in the pointer (step S451), and sets the command Processing is executed (step S452). Thereby, control for transmitting an ending command corresponding to the jackpot type is executed.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the jackpot end time (execution time of the ending effect) for notifying the player of the end of the jackpot in the jackpot control timer (step S453), and sets the value of the special symbol process flag. The value is updated according to the big hit end process (step S307) (step S454).

  When the big hit end time is set in step S453, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the re-drawing effect is executed during the ending by checking whether the ending execution flag is set, and re-draws during the ending. When the effect is not executed, a shorter time than the case where the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending is set as the jackpot end time (end effect execution time). For example, 10 seconds is set as the execution time of the ending effect that executes the re-lottery effect, and 3 seconds is set as the execution time of the ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect. Thus, when it is not necessary to notify the transition to the probable change state by making the execution time of the ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect shorter than the execution time of the ending effect that executes the re-lottery effect In addition, it is possible to avoid that the production is unnecessarily performed for a long time.

  When it is a big hit of two rounds in step S443 (N in step S443), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 2 (step S455 in FIG. 29). If the value of the round counter is not 2 (N in Step S455), the address of the command transmission table for the 2 round big hit big winning opening is set in the pointer (Step S456), and the command setting process is executed. (Step S457). As a result, a control is executed to transmit a two-round big prize opening opening command for designating a display state corresponding to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 drives the solenoid 21 to release the special winning opening (step S458) and increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S459). Further, the round time for two rounds is set in the special winning opening control timer (step S460). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (step S305) (step S461).

  If the value of the round number counter is 2 (Y in step S455), the game control microcomputer 560 suddenly sets the address of the ending command transmission table for the probability variation big hit in the pointer (step S462), and sets the command. Processing is executed (step S463). As a result, the control for suddenly transmitting the ending command for probability variation big hit is executed. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a big hit end time in the big prize opening control timer (step S464), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit end processing (step S307) (step S307). S465).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the big hit ending process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize winning control timer by -1 (step S471). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S472). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S472), the process is terminated as it is. If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S472), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a game state setting process after the big hit (step S473).

  In the game state setting process after the big hit, the process of setting / resetting the probability variation flag and the short time flag according to the game state after the end of the big hit game is executed. Specifically, when the gaming state shifts to the short-time state after the big hit game ends, only the short-time flag is set, and when the gaming state shifts to the probability change state after the big hit game ends, only the probability change flag is set. When the gaming state is shifted to the probability change time-short state after the game ends, the probability change flag and the time-short flag are set.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 resets the jackpot flag (step S474). If the probability variation jackpot flag is set, the probability variation jackpot flag is reset (step S475), and the sudden probability variation flag is set. In this case, the probability variation flag is suddenly reset (step S476). If the re-lottery execution flag is set, the re-lottery execution flag is reset (step S477). If the big-hit execution flag is set, the big-hit execution is executed. The flag is reset (step S478). Further, if the ending execution flag is set, the ending execution flag is reset (step S479).

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S480).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the small hit release pre-processing (step S308) in the special symbol process. In the small hit release pre-processing, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the big prize opening control timer by 1 (step S501), and checks whether the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step). S502). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S502), the process is ended as it is. If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S502), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 2 (step S503). If the value of the round number counter is not 2 (N in step S503), the solenoid 21 is driven to control to open the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S504), and the value of the round number counter Is incremented by 1 (step S505).

  In addition, the maximum time (the round time for small hits) that the big prize opening can be opened in each round for small hits is set in the big winning prize control timer (step S506). Note that the round time for small hits is the same as the round time for two rounds (for example, 5 seconds). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit releasing process (step S309) (step S507).

  If the value of the round number counter is 2 (Y in step S503), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a small hit end time for notifying the player of the end of the small hit in the big prize opening control timer. (Step S508), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit end processing (Step S310) (Step S509).

  It should be noted that during the small hit game, the control for transmitting the special winning opening open command is not executed.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the small hit releasing process (step S309) in the special symbol process. In the small hit release processing, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize winning control timer by -1 (step S511). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S512). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S512), the processing is ended as it is. When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S512), the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to drive the solenoid 21 to close the big prize opening (opening / closing plate 20). (Step S513).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the time (interval time for small hits) from the end of the round to the start of the next round in the small winnings of the two rounds in the big prize opening control timer. (Step S514), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (Step S308) (Step S515). The interval time for small hits is, for example, 5 seconds.

  During the small hit game, the control for transmitting the command after the big winning opening is released is not executed.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (step S310) in the special symbol process. In the small hit end process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize winning control timer by -1 (step S531). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S532). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S532), the process is terminated. If the value of the big prize winning control timer is 0 (Y in step S532), the game control microcomputer 560 resets the small hit flag (step S533) and sets the special symbol process flag value to the special symbol normal symbol. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the process (step S300) (step S534).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the decorative symbol command control process (step S28). In the decorative symbol command control process, the game control microcomputer 560 loads the decorative symbol command transmission pointer onto the pointer (step S551), and loads the data pointed to by the pointer (step S552). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether it is the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command (variation pattern command, symbol information designation command, start winning memory designation command) (step S553). At this time, if it is the timing for transmitting the variation pattern command, the address of the variation command transmission table is stored in the decoration symbol command transmission pointer in step S215 of the variation pattern setting processing (step S301) in the special symbol process (step S26). The data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the variable command transmission table. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can determine whether or not it is the timing to transmit the variation pattern command based on whether or not the data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the variation command transmission table.

  When it is time to transmit the variation pattern command (Y in step S553), the game control microcomputer 560 executes command set processing. As a result, control for transmitting the variation pattern command is executed. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the pointer in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer (step S555).

  At this time, in step S572 of the command set process (FIG. 35) executed in step S554, the address of the command transmission table is incremented by 1, so that the address pointed to by the pointer is changed from the address of the variable command transmission table to the symbol information designation command. This is the address of the transmission table. Accordingly, in step S555, the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer.

  In the decorative symbol command control processing when the next timer interrupt occurs (after 2 ms), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the decorative symbol command transmission pointer again to the pointer (step S551), and stores the data pointed to by the pointer. It is loaded (step S552), and it is determined whether it is the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command (variation pattern command, symbol information designation command, start winning memory designation command) (step S553). At this time, if it is time to transmit the symbol information designation command, in step S555, the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer, and the data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table. It has become. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can determine whether or not it is the timing to transmit the symbol information designation command based on whether or not the data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table.

  When it is time to transmit the symbol information designation command (Y in step S553), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a command set process (step S554). As a result, control for transmitting a symbol information designation command is executed. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the pointer in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer (step S555).

  At this time, in step S572 of the command set process (FIG. 35) executed in step S554, the address of the command transmission table is incremented by 1, so that the address pointed to by the pointer starts from the address of the symbol information designation command transmission table. This is the address of the storage designation command transmission table. Accordingly, in step S555, the address of the start winning memory designation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer.

  In the decorative symbol command control processing when the next timer interrupt occurs (after 2 ms), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the decorative symbol command transmission pointer again to the pointer (step S551), and stores the data pointed to by the pointer. It is loaded (step S552), and it is determined whether it is the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command (variation pattern command, symbol information designation command, start winning memory designation command) (step S553). At this time, if it is time to transmit the start winning memory designation command, in step S555, the address of the start winning memory designation command transmission table is stored in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer, and the data pointed to by the pointer is transmitted to the start winning memory designation command. It is the address of the table. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can determine whether it is the timing to transmit the start winning memory designation command based on whether or not the data pointed to by the pointer is the address of the start winning memory designation command transmission table. .

  When it is time to transmit the start winning memory designation command (Y in step S553), the game control microcomputer 560 executes a command set process (step S554). Thereby, control for transmitting the start winning memory designation command is executed. The start prize memory designation command is an effect control command for designating (notifying) the current start prize memory number (holding memory number). The start prize memory number is confirmed in the storage process (step S33), and The number is set as a value designated by the start winning memory designation command. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the pointer in the decorative symbol command transmission pointer (step S555).

  In this case, when the address of the command transmission table is incremented by 1 in step S572 of the command set process (FIG. 35) executed in step S554, the command transmission table for transmitting the decorative symbol command by the address indicated by the pointer. The address is not shown. Accordingly, in the decorative symbol command control process when the next timer interrupt occurs (after 2 ms), the decorative symbol command transmission pointer is loaded again into the pointer (step S551), and the data pointed to by the pointer is loaded (step S552). Whether or not it is the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command is determined (step S553), but it is determined in step S553 that it is not the transmission timing of the decorative symbol command.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing command set processing. As described above, the command set process is executed in steps S56, S363, S367, S372, S405, S410, S430, S436, S446, S452, S457, S463, and S554. The command set process is a process including a command output process and an INT signal output process.

  In the command set process, the game control microcomputer 560 first loads the command data 1 pointed to by the address in the command transmission table (step S561), and executes (calls) the command transmission process shown in FIG. 36 (step S562). .

  In the command transmission process shown in FIG. 36, the game control microcomputer 560 first outputs a transmission command (effect control command) to the output port 1 (step S581). As a result, the MODE data of the first byte in the production control command having a 2-byte structure is output from the output port 1.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the effect control signal INT output bit in the port buffer (step S582), and loads the port 2 buffer (step S583). In this embodiment, for example, “1” is set in the port buffer as an effect control signal INT output bit, and data “0” in the port 2 buffer is loaded. Then, the logical sum of the port 2 buffer and the port buffer is calculated (step S584), and the calculation result is output to the output port 2 (step S585). In this embodiment, when the calculation result is “1”, an on-state (high level) effect control INT signal is output from the output port 2. In response to the output of the on-state effect control INT signal, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a process of receiving (capturing) a transmission command.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a predetermined value in the wait counter (step S586), and subtracts one by one until the value becomes 0 (steps S587, S588). This process is a process for setting the ON period (high level period) of the effect control INT signal. When the value of the wait counter becomes 0 (Y in step S588), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the port 2 buffer (step S589) and outputs the port 2 buffer to the output port 2 (step S590). As a result, an effect control INT signal in the off state (low level) is output from the output port 2.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a predetermined value in the wait counter (step S591), and subtracts one by one until the value becomes 0 (steps S592, S593). This process is a process for setting the off period (low level period) of the effect control INT signal. When the value of the wait counter becomes 0 (Y in step S593), the process returns to the command set process in FIG.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 35, the game control microcomputer 560 adds 1 to the address of the command transmission table (step S563). Then, the address of the command transmission table is saved in the stack or the like (step S564).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 tests the work area reference designation bit (bit 7) of the command data 2 (step S565), and determines whether or not the value of the work area reference designation bit of the command data 2 is “0”. Is determined (step S566). If it is not 0 (N in step S566), the head address of the command extended data address table is set in the pointer (step S567), and the address is calculated by adding the value of bit 6 to bit 0 of the command data 2 to the pointer. (Step S568). Then, the data (command extension data) in the area pointed to by the address (pointer) is loaded (step S569).

  In the command extended data address table, EXT data (second byte data in a 2-byte effect control command) that can be sent to the effect control microcomputer 100 is sequentially set. Therefore, if the value of the work area reference designation bit is “1” by the above processing, the EXT data in the command extended data address table corresponding to the contents of the command data 2 is loaded, and the value of the work area reference designation bit is If "0", the contents of the command data 2 are loaded as they are. Even when EXT data is read from the command extension data address table, bit 7 of the data is “0”.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 executes (calls) a command transmission processing routine (step S570). 36, the EXT data and the effect control INT signal are sent out at the same timing as the case of sending the MODE data. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 restores the address of the command transmission table (step S571), and adds 1 to the address of the command transmission table (step S572). When the address of the command transmission table is incremented by 1, if the address is the address of the command transmission table for transmitting the decorative symbol command, as described above, the decorative symbol command control process performs the decorative symbol command control processing. If the transmission process (command set process) is executed and the address is not the address of the command transmission table for transmitting the decorative symbol command, the decorative symbol command transmission process (command set process) is not executed in the decorative symbol command control process.

  As described above, the production control command having a 2-byte structure is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. In the effect control microcomputer 100, when the rising of the effect control INT signal as the capture signal is detected, the effect control command capturing process is started. Before the capture process is completed, the game control microcomputer 560 A new signal is not output to the signal line. That is, reliable command reception processing is performed in the production control microcomputer 100. The effect control microcomputer 100 may start the effect control command capturing process at the fall of the effect control INT signal. In addition, the polarity of the effect control INT signal may be reversed (it may be at a low level when instructing command capture).

  Next, the transmission timing of each effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described.

  FIG. 37 is a timing chart showing the transmission timing of the effect control command when the 15-round jackpot game is executed. As shown in FIG. 37, every time a start winning occurs and variable symbol display is started on the special symbol display 8, the background designation command corresponding to the gaming state in the special symbol normal processing (step S300). Is sent. Also, in the special symbol normal process (step S300), the type of big hit is determined when it is out of place, big hit, small hit or big hit. In the variation pattern setting process (step S301), the variation pattern is determined, and a variation pattern command designating the determined variation pattern is transmitted in the decorative symbol command control process (step S28). Subsequently, in the decorative symbol command control process (step S28), the symbol information designation command corresponding to the losing, big hit (big hit type) and small hit determined in the special symbol normal process is transmitted, and the start winning memory designation command is further transmitted. (The start winning memory designation command at this time is a command indicating that the start winning memory number has been decremented by -1 due to the start of fluctuation). In the example shown in FIG. 37, an effect control command for designating a variation pattern for jackpot is transmitted as the variation pattern command, and an effect control command for designating a big hit of 15 rounds as a symbol information designating command (suddenly probable variation big hit and small hit It is assumed that an effect control command other than a command for designating is transmitted. Then, the special symbol variation time is measured in the special symbol variation processing (step S302).

  In the effect control microcomputer 100, the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560 shows a variation pattern dedicated to a loss, a variation pattern dedicated to a probable jackpot, a variation pattern dedicated to a normal jackpot, and a variation pattern dedicated to a sudden probability variation jackpot. If it is a variation pattern command, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9 is determined based on the command. On the other hand, if the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560 is a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit or sudden variation / big hit / small hit, the pattern information received thereafter. Based on the designation command, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9 is determined.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the variation of the decorative pattern in the variable display device 9 based on the reception of the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560.

  In addition, when the execution of the re-lottery effect is designated by the received variation pattern command, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the re-lottery effect during the variable display of the decorative symbols on the variable display device 9.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether it is a loss or a big hit or a small hit based on the symbol information designation command from the game control microcomputer 560. The presence / absence of execution and the execution timing are also confirmed.

  In the special symbol stop process (step S303), when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, a decorative symbol stop designation command is transmitted. When receiving the decoration symbol stop designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 derives and displays the already determined decoration symbol stop symbol.

  If the stop symbol of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, a fanfare command corresponding to the jackpot type is transmitted in the special symbol stop process (step S303). Based on the fanfare command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a fanfare effect informing the start of the big hit game on the variable display device 9.

  In the big prize opening pre-processing (step S304), when the jackpot display time elapses, the big prize opening is opened, and a 15-round big prize opening opening command for designating the first round display is transmitted. The The production control microcomputer 100 displays the round display of the first round on the variable display device 9 based on the command for opening the big prize opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  When the round time elapses in the process for opening the special prize opening (step S305), the special prize opening is closed, and a command for opening the big prize opening for 15 rounds specifying the interval display after the first round is transmitted. The The production control microcomputer 100 displays an interval display on the variable display device 9 until the next round (second round) is started based on the command after the big winning opening is opened from the game control microcomputer 560.

  When the interval time elapses in the post-opening process for the special winning opening (step S306), the special winning opening is opened and a command for opening the special winning opening for 15 rounds specifying the round display of the second round is transmitted. . The production control microcomputer 100 displays the round display of the second round on the variable display device 9 based on the command for opening the big prize opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  By repeatedly executing the process during opening of the special winning opening and the process after opening the special winning opening as described above, the round display of each round and the interval display between rounds are displayed, and the round advances in order. In the special symbol normal process (step S300), when it is determined that the re-lottery effect is to be executed during the big hit game, it is re-executed during a predetermined predetermined round (in the 15th round in the example of FIG. 37). A lottery effect is executed.

  In the fifteenth round winning opening opening post-process (step S306), when the interval time has elapsed, an ending command corresponding to the jackpot type is transmitted. On the basis of the ending command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes an ending effect informing that the jackpot game has ended on the variable display device 9. In the special symbol normal process (step S300), when it is determined to execute the re-lottery effect during the ending, the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending (in the ending effect). In the example shown in FIG. 37, the re-lottery effect is also executed in the ending effect. The re-lottery effect may be executed a plurality of times after the big hit game is started, but in this embodiment, when the re-lottery effect is executed after the big hit game is started, it is always promoted to a probable big hit. It will be executed only once. Therefore, when the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, the re-lottery effect is not executed during the ending.

  Thereafter, in the big hit end process (step S307), when the big hit end time has elapsed, after the big hit game state setting process etc. is executed, the process returns to the special symbol normal process (step S300) again, and the special symbol change starts. Is done.

  FIG. 38 is a timing chart showing the transmission timing of the effect control command when the two-round big hit game (suddenly probable big hit game) and the small hit game are executed. As in the case shown in FIG. 37, each time a start winning occurs and variable symbol display is started on the special symbol display 8, the special symbol normal processing (step S300) is performed in accordance with the gaming state. A background specification command is sent. Also, in the special symbol normal process (step S300), the type of big hit is determined when it is out of place, big hit, small hit or big hit. In the variation pattern setting process (step S301), the variation pattern is determined, and a variation pattern command designating the determined variation pattern is transmitted in the decorative symbol command control process (step S28). Subsequently, in the decorative symbol command control process (step S28), a symbol information designation command corresponding to the failure determined in the special symbol normal process, the big hit (big hit type), and the small hit is transmitted. Is sent. In the example shown in FIG. 38, an effect control command for designating a sudden probability change or small hit variation pattern is transmitted as the variation pattern command, and an effect control command for designating sudden probability change big hit or small hit as the symbol information designation command. Is sent. Then, the special symbol variation time is measured in the special symbol variation processing (step S302).

  If the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560 is a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern dedicated to the probability variation big hit, the presentation control microcomputer 100 stops and displays the variable display device 9 on the basis of the command. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined. On the other hand, if the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560 is a sudden variation / big hit / small variation variation pattern command, the effect control microcomputer 100 can change the variation based on the symbol information designation command received thereafter. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the display device 9 is determined.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the variation of the decorative pattern in the variable display device 9 based on the reception of the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 suddenly confirms the probability change big hit or the small hit based on the symbol information designation command from the game control microcomputer 560. It should be noted that the re-lottery effect is not executed in the case of suddenly big hits and small hits.

  In the special symbol stop process (step S303), when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, a decorative symbol stop designation command is transmitted. When receiving the decoration symbol stop designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 derives and displays the already determined decoration symbol stop symbol.

  If the special symbol stop symbol is a sudden probability variation symbol, a fanfare command designating the start of sudden probability variation jackpot is transmitted in the special symbol suspension process (step S303). If the stop symbol of the special symbol is a small hit symbol, a fanfare command designating the start of the small hit is transmitted in the special symbol stop process (step S303). The production control microcomputer 100 suddenly starts a probable large hit game or a small hit game based on the fanfare command from the game control microcomputer 560. Note that when a probable big hit game or a small hit game is suddenly started, an effect for two rounds is executed. The effect for two rounds is a series of special effects that are executed from the start to the end of the sudden change big hit game or the small hit game. For example, when a probability variation symbol or a small hit symbol is suddenly stopped as a decorative symbol stop symbol, a special two-round effect that suddenly causes a character to appear or play a movie image is started. When the two-round production ends, the production mode shifts to a chance mode in which the transition of the probability change state is expected.

  When the probability change big hit game is suddenly started, in the big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S304), when the big winning display time elapses, the big winning opening is opened and the display state at the first round is designated. A command for opening a big prize opening for two rounds is sent. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the command for opening the big prize opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  When the round time elapses in the process for opening the big prize opening (step S305), the big prize opening is closed, and a command after opening the big prize opening for two rounds that specifies the display state after the first round is transmitted. Is done. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for the two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the command after the special winning opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  In the post-opening process for the big winning opening (step S306), when the interval time elapses, the big winning opening is opened, and a two-round big winning big opening opening command specifying the display state at the second round is issued. Sent. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the command for opening the big prize opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  In the second round big opening opening process (step S305), when the round time elapses, the big winning opening is closed and the big winning opening for two rounds big hit that specifies the display state after the second round is designated. A command is sent after release. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for the two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the command after the special winning opening from the game control microcomputer 560.

  In the post-opening process for the special winning opening after the second round (step S306), when the interval time elapses, an ending command for designating the end of the sudden probability change big hit is transmitted. The effect control microcomputer 100 switches the display screen of the effect for two rounds executed in the variable display device 9 based on the ending command from the game control microcomputer 560.

  Thereafter, in the big hit end process (step S307), when the big hit end time has elapsed, after the big hit game state setting process etc. is executed, the process returns to the special symbol normal process (step S300) again, and the special symbol change starts. Is done.

  When the small hit game is started, the big winning opening is opened when the small hit display time has elapsed in the small hit release pre-processing (step S308).

  In the small hit opening process (step S309), when the round time elapses, the big prize opening is closed.

  In the pre-opening process for small hits after the first round (step S308), when the interval time elapses, the big winning opening is opened.

  In the second round small hit opening process (step S309), when the round time elapses, the big prize opening is closed.

  In the pre-opening process for small hits after the second round (step S308), when the interval time has elapsed, the process proceeds to a small hitting end process.

  Thereafter, in the small hit end process (step S310), when the small hit end time has elapsed, after resetting the small hit flag, the process returns to the special symbol normal process (step S300) again to start the change of the special symbol. Is done.

  In addition, during the round in the small hit game (similarly in the sudden probability change big hit game), the opening time (round time) of the big prize opening is short. For this reason, since 10 game balls do not win the big winning opening, the big winning opening is not closed within the round time. Accordingly, since the time from the start to the end of the game is constant, the display control state of the effect for two rounds is not based on the presentation control microcomputer 100 receiving the command for opening the big prize opening or the command after opening the big prize opening. Can be switched. Therefore, in the small hit game, the game control microcomputer 560 does not perform the process of transmitting the special winning opening opening command or the special winning opening open command. Note that even in the case of a sudden probability big hit, the game control microcomputer 560 may not perform the process of transmitting the command for opening the big prize opening or the command after opening the big prize opening.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80. The production control microcomputer 100 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the start interval of the effect control processing (step S701). Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 proceeds to a loop process for confirming the monitoring of the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interruption occurs, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a timer interruption flag in the timer interruption process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control microcomputer 100 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first analyzes the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the variable display device 9 is executed. In addition, various random numbers for determining the stop symbol of the decorative design (random numbers for left symbol determination, random numbers for right symbol determination, random numbers for medium symbol determination, random number for reach determination, extracted with reach reach determination processing) Random number update processing for updating the count value of the counter for generating the reach symbol determination random number and the medium symbol determination random number (step S706). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  40 to 42 are flowcharts showing the command analysis process (step S704) in the main process. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is stored in the command reception buffer. In the command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control microcomputer 100 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (background specifying command: 9500 (H) to 9503 (H)) for specifying the background in the variable display device 9 (Y in step S613), the effect control microcomputer 100 is used. Confirms the gaming state based on the content of the background designation command, and sets the confirmed gaming state in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S614). And the control which displays the background image according to a game state on the variable display apparatus 9 is performed (step S615).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (variation pattern command: 8000 (H) to 806A (H)) that specifies a change pattern (step S616), the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the command EXT. Data is stored in the fluctuation pattern data storage area in the RAM (step S617), and a fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (step S618).

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command is a variation pattern command designating a variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit (step S619), and a variation pattern for both common big hit / probable variation big hit. If it is not a variation pattern command for designating (N in step S619), it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command is for designating a variation pattern for both sudden and promising large hit / small hit (step S620). If the variation pattern command is not a variation pattern command for designating a variation pattern for both sudden and promising large hits / small hits (N in step S620), the first decorative symbol determination process is executed (step S621). The detailed contents of the first decorative symbol determination process will be described later (see FIG. 43). When the variation pattern command is for designating a variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit (Y in step S619), or for the variation pattern command for designating a variation pattern for sudden probability variation big hit / small hit (in step S620). Y) A combined flag indicating that a variation pattern command designating a variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit or sudden variation for sudden big variation / small hit is received is set (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (symbol information specifying command: 8C00 (H) to 8C06 (H)) for specifying symbol information (Y in step S623), the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the symbol control. A symbol information command reception flag indicating that the information designation command has been received is set (step S624). And it is confirmed whether the stop symbol of a decoration symbol has already been determined (step S625A). Here, if the variation pattern command is not a command for designating a variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable big hit or sudden variation / big hit / small hit, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol has already been set in the first decorative symbol determination process. It has been decided. Therefore, it can be confirmed whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol has already been determined depending on whether or not the dual-purpose flag is set.

  When the decorative symbol stop symbol has not yet been determined (N in step S625A), the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the second decorative symbol determination process (step S626). The detailed contents of the second decorative symbol determination process will be described later (see FIG. 66). When the decorative symbol stop symbol has already been determined (Y in step S625A), the production control microcomputer 100 executes the redrawing effect after the symbol information designation command is a big hit, and promotes the non-probable variation symbol to the certain variation symbol. It is confirmed whether it is a command that designates to be performed, that is, a two-specific command per probability variation (8C03 (H)) or a three-specific command (8C04 (H)) per probability variation large (step S625B). If it is a symbol information designation command that designates promotion after a big win (Y in step S625B), the production control microcomputer 100 sets a re-lottery effect execution flag indicating that a re-lottery effect is executed after the big win ( Step S625C). If it is a command with 2 probable big hits, a re-lottery effect execution flag is set to indicate that a re-lottery effect is to be executed during the big win. Set an ending re-lottery effect execution flag indicating that the game is to be performed. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S625D), and uses the common jackpot symbol selection table (F-2) shown in FIG. 71 according to the extracted random number value. Is determined and stored (step S625E). The probability variation symbol determined in this way is a probability variation symbol derived and displayed in the re-lottery effect executed after the big hit game is started. The contents of the common jackpot symbol selection table will be described later.

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (start winning memory designation command: C0XX (H)) for designating the starting winning memory number (Y in step S627), the start winning memory display control process is executed (step S627). S628). The start winning memory display control process is a process for performing a control for displaying a display (start winning memory display) that can specify the start winning memory number in a predetermined area of the variable display device 9. In this process, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms the number of start winning memories based on the start winning memory designation command, and displays the confirmed number of start winning memories on the variable display device 9.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the start prize memory designation command is a start prize memory designation command for designating the start prize memory number -1 transmitted at the start of variation, that is, in the decorative symbol command control process. It is determined whether the start winning memory designation command is transmitted next to the symbol information designation command (step S629). Here, whether or not it is a start prize memory designation command for designating the start prize memory number −1, for example, in the start prize memory display control process, stores the start prize memory number designated by the start prize memory designation command. The determination can be made by checking whether or not the number of start winning memories specified by the next received start winning memory specifying command is -1. If it is not the start winning memory designation command for designating the starting winning memory number −1 (N in Step S629), the process returns to Step S611. If it is the start winning memory designation command for designating the starting winning memory number −1 (Y in step S629), the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the symbol information command reception flag is set (step S630). If the flag is set (Y in step S630), it means that the symbol information designation command has been successfully received before the start winning memory designation command, and the process returns to step S611.

  If the symbol information command reception flag is not set (N in step S630), it indicates that the symbol information designation command has not been received normally before the start winning memory designation command. That is, it means that the symbol information designation command is missed in the production control microcomputer 100. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the decorative symbol stop symbol has already been determined in step S621 (step S631), and if it has already been determined (Y in step S631), the step S611 is performed. Return to processing. If the decorative symbol stop symbol has not yet been determined (N in step S631), a provisionally determined symbol determination process is executed (step S632). Temporarily determined symbol determination processing, when a variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probable variation jackpot is received, but when a symbol information designation command is missed, a non-probable variation symbol is provisionally determined, and a sudden variation variation command command for sudden probability variation big hit / small hit Is received, but when the symbol information designation command is missed, the small hit symbol is tentatively determined. The detailed contents of the temporary determination symbol determination process will be described later (see FIG. 92).

  In addition to the case where the symbol information designation command is missed, if the symbol information designation command is not completely received, that is, the MODE data and the EXT data of the symbol information designation command cannot be received. Also included is a case of receiving a command that is not a symbol information designation command, such as a garbled command. For example, when the MODE data of the symbol information designation command is garbled, a command that is not a symbol information designation command (including a command that cannot be recognized by the production control microcomputer 100) is received, or the symbol information designation command EXT This is the case, for example, when an EXT data command (see FIG. 15) that is not defined as a symbol information designation command is received because the data is garbled.

  The EXT data of the symbol information specifying command is garbled. However, when a command defined as the symbol information specifying command is received, the symbol information specifying command is an inconsistent symbol information specifying command in the control process. It will be received. In this case, when the effect control microcomputer 100 recognizes that the symbol information designation command has been received, the symbol information command reception flag is set (step S624), and the flag is set in step S630 (step S630). There is a possibility that the provisionally determined symbol determination process is not executed (Y in S630) (step S632). However, if the garbled symbol information designation command is a command other than the normal jackpot designation command (8C01 (H)) or the probable variation jackpot designation command (8C02 (H) to 8C04 (H)), the decorative symbol has not yet been determined. Although there is no symbol (N in step S631), it is possible to determine that the variation pattern command and the symbol information specifying command are not matched by receiving such a symbol information specifying command. In such a case, it is preferable to execute a provisionally determined symbol determination process (step S632).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (fanfare command: A000 (H) to A004 (H), A600 (H)) for designating a big hit or a small hit (fanfare) (Y in step S633). The production control microcomputer 100 sets a fanfare reception flag corresponding to the content of the fanfare command (step S634). For example, depending on the contents of the fanfare command (such as the type of jackpot), a fanfare reception flag indicating the start of a normal jackpot, a fanfare reception flag indicating the start of a promiscuous jackpot (no redrawing effect), a promising big hit (a redrawing effect during a jackpot) Fanfare reception flag indicating the start of execution), fanfare reception flag indicating the start of probability variation big hit (execution of re-draw lottery with ending), fanfare reception flag indicating the start of sudden probability variation big hit, fanfare reception flag indicating the start of small hit To do.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not a command non-reception flag indicating that the symbol information designation command has not been received is set (step S635). The command non-reception flag is set in the temporary determination symbol determination process (see step S685 in FIG. 92). At this time, if the command not received flag is set, it means that the normal pattern of big hit / probable variation big hit combined fluctuation pattern command or sudden probability variation big hit / small hit combined variation pattern command has been received, but the symbol information designation command is Since it is not received and it cannot be determined whether it is a probable big hit or normal big hit, or suddenly it is not possible to judge whether it is a probable big hit or a small hit, so the stop pattern of the decorative symbol has not been determined (decorative symbol determination process in the decorative symbol determination process) This means that the stop symbol is temporarily determined).

  When the command non-reception flag is not set (N of step S635), the process returns to step S611. When the command non-reception flag is set (Y in step S635), it is confirmed whether or not the big hit is a probable big hit (excluding the sudden probable big hit) based on the fanfare reception flag or the like (step S636). If it is not a probable big hit (N in step S636), the process returns to step S611. If it is a probable big hit (Y in step S636), the production control microcomputer 100 executes a third probable symbol determination process for determining a probable symbol as a decorative symbol stop symbol (step S637). Detailed contents of the third probability variation design determination process will be described later (see FIG. 93). The probability variation symbol determined and stored in the third probability variation symbol determination process is derived from the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game when the command non-reception flag is set (when the symbol information designation command is not yet received). It is the last stop symbol displayed.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not it is necessary to execute the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game based on the fanfare reception flag (step S638). Even if it is not necessary to execute the re-lottery effect, that is, even if the fanfare command designating the execution of the re-lottery effect is not received during the big hit or the ending (N in step S638), the re-lottery effect is performed. Must be executed. This is because, when a variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probable variation jackpot is received but a symbol information designation command is not received, a non-probable variation symbol is determined as a temporary jackpot symbol in the provisional symbol determination process (see FIG. 92). ), Since the non-probable variation symbol has already been derived and displayed, if the true jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot (excluding sudden probability variation jackpots), the probability variation symbol is re-established so as not to disadvantage the player. This is because it is necessary to derive and display the lottery effect. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts the execution timing determination random number (step S639), and determines the re-lottery effect execution timing according to the extracted value of the execution timing determination random number (step S640). Then, a re-lottery execution flag corresponding to the determined execution timing is set (step S642). Specifically, when it is determined that the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, the re-lottery execution flag during the big hit is set, and when it is determined that the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending, A lottery execution flag is set.

  If it is determined in step S640 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed in the ending, the symbol information designating command is not actually executed in the ending, but the symbol information designation command is the microcomputer 100 for effect control. Since it was not received at ending, it was necessary to execute a re-lottery effect at the ending. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may execute an ending effect for when the symbol information designation command is not received (an ending effect of 3 seconds for executing the re-lottery effect). In this embodiment, since the execution time of the ending effect for executing the re-lottery effect is 10 seconds and the execution time of the ending effect for which the re-lottery effect is not executed is 3 seconds, the re-lottery effect is executed by ending in step S640. If it is decided to do so, an ending effect with an execution time of 10 seconds will be executed. However, if an ending effect with an execution time of 10 seconds is executed when no symbol information designation command has been received, the game control micro This is because the control timing on the computer 560 side does not match. Also, in order to synchronize the execution time of the ending effect between the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100, the ending is not determined as the execution timing of the re-lottery effect in step S640 (always the re-lottery). It is also possible to determine that a big hit is made as the execution timing of the production).

  On the other hand, when it is necessary to execute the re-lottery effect, that is, when a fanfare command for specifying the execution of the re-lottery effect is received during the big hit or the ending (Y in step S638), the fanfare command is specified. The timing is determined as the execution timing of the re-lottery effect (step S641). Then, a re-lottery execution flag corresponding to the determined execution timing is set (step S642).

  If the variation pattern command for sudden probability big hit / small hit is received suddenly, but no symbol information designation command is received, the small hit symbol is determined as a temporary stop symbol in the temporary determination symbol determination process (FIG. 92). See), and the small hit symbol is derived and displayed. Therefore, it is preferable to derive and display a sudden probability variation symbol in a redrawing effect so as not to give a disadvantage to the player when it is a sudden probability variation big hit instead of a small hit. However, since the small hit symbol is very similar to the sudden probability change symbol, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the small symbol is generated by the stop symbol or whether the sudden probability variable big symbol is generated. For this reason, even if the game state is shifted to the probable change state even though the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, it is considered that the player does not feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in this embodiment, a re-lottery effect that suddenly promotes a small hit symbol to a probable variation symbol during execution of the two-round effect is not executed. However, such a re-lottery effect may be executed.

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (ending command: A301 (H) to A305 (H)) for designating the end of the jackpot (ending) (Y in step S643), the effect control microcomputer 100 has The ending reception flag corresponding to the content of the ending command is set (step S644). For example, depending on the content of the ending command (such as jackpot type), an ending reception flag indicating the end of a normal jackpot, an ending reception flag indicating the end of a promiscuous jackpot (no redrawing effect), a promising big hit (redrawing effect during a jackpot) An ending reception flag indicating the end of execution), an ending reception flag indicating the end of probability variation jackpot (execution of re-lottery effect by ending), and an ending reception flag indicating the end of sudden probability variation jackpot.

  If the received command read in step S612 is another effect control command, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a flag corresponding to the received command (step S645).

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the first decorative symbol determination process (step S621). In the first decorative symbol determination process, when the received variation pattern command is a variation pattern command dedicated to a disconnection (Y in step S651), a disconnection determination flag indicating that the disconnection has been determined is set (step S652). ), Whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern with reach is checked (step S653). If it is not a variation pattern with reach (N in step S653), the production control microcomputer 100 executes reach no-miss determination processing (step S654). The detailed contents of the reach-less losing determination process will be described later (see FIG. 44).

  If it is a variation pattern with reach (Y of step S653), the production control microcomputer 100 executes reach determination loss determination processing (step S655). The detailed contents of the reach loss determination process will be described later (see FIG. 53).

  If the variation pattern command is not for the outlier-specific variation pattern command (N in step S651) but for the probability variation big hit (Y in step S656), the production control microcomputer 100 indicates that the probability variation big hit has been determined. A probability variation big hit determination flag is set (step S657). Then, a first probability variation design determination process is executed (step S658). Details of the first probability variation design determination process will be described later (see FIGS. 61 and 62).

  If it is not a variation pattern command dedicated to a promiscuous jackpot (N in step S656) but a variation pattern command dedicated to a normal jackpot (Y in step S659), the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the normal jackpot has been determined. The normal big hit determination flag shown is set (step S660). Then, a first uncertain variable symbol determination process is executed (step S661). The detailed contents of the first non-probable variable symbol determination process will be described later (see FIG. 63).

  When it is not the variation pattern command dedicated to the normal big hit (N in Step S659) but the variation pattern command dedicated to the sudden probability variation big hit, the effect control microcomputer 100 indicates that the sudden probability variation big hit indicating that the sudden probability variation big hit has been determined. A determination flag is set (step S662). Then, a sudden probability variation design determination process is executed (step S663). The detailed contents of the sudden probability variation design determination process will be described later (see FIG. 64).

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing reachless losing determination processing (step S654). In the reach-less loss determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a left symbol determination random number (step S1001). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the left symbol of the off symbol using the left symbol selection table (T-1) shown in FIG. 45 according to the extracted random value (step S1002). In the left symbol selection table, as shown in FIG. 45, a plurality of determination values are assigned to each left symbol approximately equally. The left symbol selection table (T-1) shown in FIG. 45 is a table for determining the middle symbol in the left display area of the variable display device 9. The number associated with each left symbol indicates the number of assigned judgment values. The total number of assigned determination values is the same as the number (range) of updated random values. “Max67” indicates that the number of random values is 67 (0 to 66). Therefore, in the left symbol selection table, for example, the ratio at which the left symbol “8” is determined is 4/67. This also applies to other tables (for example, “max103” indicates that the number of random values is 103 (0 to 102)).

  The production control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value as the left symbol. The determined left symbol is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM.

  In this embodiment, the random number for determining the left symbol (left symbol determining random number) extracted in step S1001 of the reach-less losing determination process is referred to as a first symbol random number (first identification information random number).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts the right symbol determining random number (step S1003). Then, according to the extracted random number value, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the right symbol of the off symbol using the right symbol selection table (T-2) corresponding to the left symbol shown in FIG. S1004). In the right symbol selection table, as shown in FIG. 46, a plurality of determination values are assigned to a matrix of left symbols and right symbols. A plurality of right symbol selection tables are prepared for each left symbol already determined. For example, when the determined left symbol is “8”, the uppermost table in FIG. 46 becomes the right symbol selection table corresponding to the left symbol “8”. The right symbol selection table (T-2) shown in FIG. 46 is a table for determining the middle symbol of the right display area in the variable display device 9.

  In the right symbol selection table, the number of determination values assigned to the same symbol as the determined left symbol is “0” in order to prevent reach. For example, when the determined left symbol is “8”, the number of determination values assigned to the right symbol “8” in the right symbol selection table corresponding to the left symbol “8” is “0”. . When the left symbol is “*” (“*” between “7” and “8”), the upper symbol on the left display area is “7” and the lower symbol is “8”. , The right symbol “*” (“*” between “6” and “7”) where the upper symbol on the right display area is “7”, the lower symbol on the right display area is “8” The right symbol “*” (“*” between “7” and “8”), and the right symbol “*” (“8” in the lower display area on the right display area) The number of determination values assigned to “*” between “8” and “1” is “0”.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 selects the right symbol selection table corresponding to the left symbol determined in step S1002, and determines the symbol having the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1003 as the right symbol.

  In this embodiment, the random number for determining the right symbol (right symbol determining random number) extracted in step S1003 of the reach-less losing determination process is referred to as a second symbol random number (second identification information random number). As shown in FIG. 46, the second symbol random number is “max103”, that is, the random number value is 0 to 102, and is different from the first symbol random number “max67”.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1005). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the medium symbol selection table (T-3) shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 by using the chance prohibition table (T-4) shown in FIG. S1006). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol of the off symbol using the middle symbol selection table (T-3) selected in step S1006 according to the extracted random number value (step S1007). The middle symbol selection table (T-3) shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is a table for determining the middle symbol of the display area in the variable display device 9.

  Here, as described above, in this embodiment, in order to avoid misunderstanding that the chance eye is derived and displayed when the outlier symbol is derived and displayed, in this embodiment, the chance eye (chance eye A, chance eye B, The control is executed to prohibit the derivation and display of the same symbol as the chance symbol for sudden accuracy (sudden probability variation symbol) and the chance symbol for small hit (small hit symbol). Further, in this embodiment, a symbol (probability similar symbol, small hit similarity symbol) similar to the chance item (probability chance item (sudden probability variation symbol), small chance item (small hit symbol)) is used. Control is also performed that prohibits derivation and display as out-of-order symbols.

  47 and 48 show arrangement patterns (chance eye prohibition patterns) of the left symbol and the right symbol in which chance eyes (including a sudden similarity symbol and a small hit similarity symbol) may occur. When the determined left symbol and right symbol correspond to the chance-forbidden patterns shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, chances (including a sudden similarity symbol and a small hit similarity symbol) may occur. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the chance eye prohibition table to check whether the determined combination of the left symbol and the right symbol corresponds to the chance eye prohibition pattern. As shown in FIG. 52, in the chance eye prohibition table, the numbers of the chance eye prohibition patterns (“LR1” to “LR80”) are assigned to the matrix of the left symbol and the right symbol. For example, when the left symbol (the middle symbol in the left display region) is “8” and the right symbol (the middle symbol in the right display region) is “2”, the chance eye prohibition pattern “LR40” (FIG. 5). Corresponds to the forbidden pattern of the chance eye 40C shown in FIG. “LR0” indicates that it does not fall under the chance eye prohibition pattern. For example, when the left symbol is “8” and the right symbol is “1”, it does not correspond to the chance prohibition pattern shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, and therefore “LR0” is assigned.

  In this way, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms which of the chance eye prohibition patterns (LR1 to LR80) corresponds to using the chance eye prohibition table, or does not correspond to the chance eye prohibition pattern. (LR0) is confirmed. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the middle symbol selection table corresponding to LR0 to LR80 from the tables of FIGS. For example, when the combination of the left symbol and the right symbol corresponds to the chance prohibition pattern “LR40”, it is decided to use the middle symbol selection table associated with “LR40” shown in FIG.

  In the middle symbol selection table associated with “LR1” to “LR80”, no judgment value is assigned to the middle symbol that establishes the chance (that is, the number of judgment values to be assigned is 0). . For example, in the middle symbol selection table associated with “LR40”, the middle symbol at the chance eye 40C shown in FIG. 5 (the middle symbol in the display area in the middle) is “1”. The number of judgment values assigned to is 0. On the other hand, in the middle symbol selection table associated with “LR0”, no chance is established no matter what symbol the middle symbol becomes, so the determination values are assigned to all symbols almost equally. ing.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 selects the middle symbol selection table in step S1006, and determines the symbol having the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1005 as the middle symbol. Thus, in the reach-less losing determination process, it is prohibited to determine the out-of-order symbol (including the sudden similarity symbol and the small hit similarity symbol) as the decorative symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the random number for determining the medium symbol (medium symbol determining random number) extracted in step S1005 of the reach-less losing determination process is referred to as a third symbol random number (third identification information random number). As shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the third design random number is “max97”, that is, the number of random numbers is 0 to 96, and the first design random number of “max67” and the second design random number of “max103”. It is a random number different from (second identification information random number).

  In this way, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are determined using different random numbers (the first symbol random number, the second symbol random number, and the third symbol random number). There are a variety of combinations of the middle right off-line symbols. That is, when the 1st design random number, the 2nd design random number, and the 3rd design random number are updated in the same range, if the update timing and extraction timing of these random numbers are synchronized, Although there is a risk of being biased, as described above, the first symbol random number, the second symbol random number, and the third symbol random number are configured to be updated in different ranges. Will not be biased.

  In the above-described reach-less-losing determination process, it is determined in step S1006 whether or not the determined combination of the left symbol and the right symbol corresponds to the chance eye prohibition pattern using the chance eye prohibition table. When it corresponds to a pattern, select the middle symbol selection table to which the judgment value is assigned so as not to determine the middle symbol that will be the chance, and determine the middle symbol using the selected middle symbol selection table Was composed. However, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, if the left middle right symbol is provisionally determined, and the temporarily determined left middle right symbol corresponds to the chance, the predetermined symbol (left symbol, middle symbol) of the temporarily determined left middle right symbol Or any one of the right symbols) may be added to +1 to change to another symbol. In addition, even if a predetermined symbol is added by +1, there is a possibility that it falls under the chance again. In this case, it is determined whether it falls under the chance again, and if it falls, the predetermined symbol is incremented by 1. It is preferable to do so. Further, when the tentatively determined symbol of the left middle right corresponds to the chance eye, it may be determined by lottery using a random number as to which one of the left, middle and right symbols is added. In addition, the number of addition values may be determined by lottery using random numbers. In addition, when the left, middle, and right symbols temporarily determined correspond to chance chances, a predetermined symbol (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) may be determined again using a random number. In addition, even if the predetermined symbol is re-determined, there is a possibility that it will fall under the chance again. In this case, it is determined whether or not it falls under the chance, and if it falls, the predetermined symbol is incremented by 1. It is preferable to do so. According to such a configuration, the randomness of the off symbol can be improved.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing reach determination loss determination processing (step S655). In the reach determination loss determination process, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a reach symbol determination random number (step S1011). Next, based on the contents of the received variation pattern command (variation pattern saved in step S617), the production control microcomputer 100 performs variation patterns with single and double reach ("S & W" in FIGS. 17 and 18). It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is marked with "" (step S1012). As shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, only the normal reach is a single / double reach, and the super reach A to D is either a single reach or a double reach. If the variation pattern has a single / double common reach (Y in step S1012), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the common reach symbol selection table shown in FIG. 54 according to the random number extracted in step S1011. Reach symbols (same left and right symbols) are determined and stored using (H-1) (step S1013).

  In the common reach symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the reach symbols (reach patterns; 1UH to 8UH, 1LH to 8LH, 1CH to 8CH, 1WH to 8WH) shown in FIG. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the design of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1011 as the reach design.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1014). Then, in accordance with the extracted random number value, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores a middle symbol using the normal symbol selection table (H-4) shown in FIG. 57 (step S1015).

  As shown in FIG. 57, the symbol selection table during normal deviation is divided for each type of normal reach (normal 8 frames, normal 12 frames, normal 15 frames, normal 17 frames), and the reach determined in step S1013. It is divided according to whether the design is single reach or double reach. Here, “frame” indicates the number of symbols (number of symbols) in which the middle symbol proceeds (varies) after the occurrence of normal reach. For example, the normal 8 frames indicates that the middle symbol fluctuates 8 frames after the normal reach occurs. In each table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the symbol differences for the reach symbols determined in step S1013. Here, in the normal symbol selection table shown in FIG. 57, unlike the middle symbol selection table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the symbol difference of the middle symbol on the reach line with respect to the reach symbol is shown. For example, in the case of UH type reach, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the upper middle symbol is shown. In addition, in the case of double reach, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the symbol afterward (for example, “1” in the case of 1WH) is shown. Since the decorative symbols are 16 symbols “1”, “*”, “2”... “*”, The symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol is “−14” to “+1”. For example, the symbol difference “−2” with respect to the reach symbol “3” becomes the middle symbol “2”.

  In the symbol selection table during normal deviation, no determination value is assigned to the symbol difference “0” with respect to the reach symbol. This is because determining the middle symbol of the symbol difference “0” results in a big hit. In addition, in the symbol selection table during normal deviation for double reach, a determination value is not assigned to the symbol difference “−2” with respect to the reach symbol. This is because if the medium symbol of the symbol difference “−2” is determined when double reach occurs, a big hit will occur. The production control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1014 as the middle symbol.

  In step S1012, if the variation pattern is not a single / double common reach (N in step S1012), the production control microcomputer 100 receives the content of the received variation pattern command (variation pattern saved in step S617). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (a variation pattern having “S” in FIGS. 17 and 18) (step S1016). If the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (Y in step S1016), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the single reach design selection table (H-2) shown in FIG. 55 according to the random number extracted in step S1011. ) Is used to determine and store the reach symbol (step S1017).

  In the single reach symbol selection table, among the reach symbols shown in FIG. 3, a plurality of determination values are assigned to single reach reach symbols (1UH to 8UH, 1LH to 8LH, 1CH to 8CH). The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the design of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1011 as the reach design.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1018). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbols using the super development middle symbol selection table (H-5) shown in FIG. 58 according to the extracted random number value (step S1019).

  As shown in FIG. 58, the super development time symbol selection table is divided depending on whether the variation pattern is for single reach or double reach. In the process of step S1019, a single reach table is used. In the super development time symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the symbol differences with respect to the reach symbol determined in step S1017. Here, in the super development middle symbol selection table shown in FIG. 58, unlike the middle symbol selection table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the middle symbol on the reach line is shown. For example, in the case of UH type reach, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the upper middle symbol is shown. In addition, in the case of double reach, the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol for the symbol afterward (for example, “1” in the case of 1WH) is shown. Note that a determination value is not assigned to the symbol difference “0” with respect to the reach symbol. This is because determining the middle symbol of the symbol difference “0” results in a big hit. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1018 as the middle symbol.

  Note that the temporary stop symbol of the middle symbol displayed temporarily before the development of super reach (after the fluctuation of normal reach) is, when it is out of reach, the symbol difference +1 with respect to the reach symbol (one frame next to the reach symbol) Design).

  In step S1016, when the variation pattern is not accompanied by a single reach (N in step S1016), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern is accompanied by a double reach. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores a reach symbol using the double reach symbol selection table (H-3) shown in FIG. 56 in accordance with the random number value extracted in step S1011 (step S1020).

  In the double reach symbol selection table, among the reach symbols shown in FIG. 3, a plurality of determination values are assigned to double reach reach symbols (IWH to 8WH). The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the design of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1011 as the reach design.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1021). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbols using the super development middle symbol selection table (H-5) shown in FIG. 58 according to the extracted random number value (step S1022).

  As shown in FIG. 58, the super development time symbol selection table is divided depending on whether the variation pattern is for single reach or double reach. In the process of step S1022, a double reach table is used. In the super development time symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the symbol differences with respect to the reach symbols determined in step S1020. Note that a determination value is not assigned to the symbol difference “0” with respect to the reach symbol. This is because determining the middle symbol of the symbol difference “0” results in a big hit. In addition, no determination value is assigned to the symbol difference “−2” with respect to the reach symbol. This is because if the medium symbol of the symbol difference “−2” is determined when double reach occurs, a big hit will occur. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1021 as the middle symbol.

  In this embodiment, the random number (reach symbol determination random number) for determining the reach symbol (left and right symbols) extracted in step S1011 of the reach-losing determination process is referred to as a reach symbol random number (reach identification information random number). As shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, the reach design random number is “max 127”, that is, a random number having a random number value of 0 to 126.

  In this embodiment, random numbers for determining the symbol difference between the reach symbol and the middle symbol extracted in steps S1014, S1018, and S1021 of the reach loss determination process are determined as symbol difference random numbers (medium symbol determination random numbers). Difference determination random number). As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the symbol difference random number is “max113”, that is, a random number having a random number value of 0 to 112. As described above, the first symbol random number, the second symbol random number, the third symbol random number, the reach symbol random number, and the symbol difference random number are different random numbers updated in different ranges.

  In this way, the design difference between the reach design and the reach design of the middle design is determined using different random numbers (reach design random number, design difference random number). There are a wide variety of combinations of outlier patterns. In other words, when the reach symbol random number and the symbol difference random number are updated in the same range, there is a possibility that the combination of the left, middle, right and left symbols will be biased if the update timing and extraction timing of those random numbers are synchronized. As described above, since the reach design random number and the design difference random number are configured to be updated in different ranges, the combination of the left middle right outlier design (the combination of the reach design and the middle design) is biased. There is no.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it is a variation pattern with a temporary stop of the chance eye A based on the contents of the received variation pattern command (variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S617). S1023). When the chance eye A is temporarily stopped and displayed, in this embodiment, the chance eye A is temporarily stopped and displayed when the normal fluctuation is stopped, and then an effect of developing into super reach is executed.

  When the variation pattern is accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance A (Y in Step S1023), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (Step S1024). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye A using the chance eye A selection table (H-6) corresponding to the reach symbol shown in FIG. 59 according to the extracted random number value (step S1025). ). For example, when the reach symbol determined in steps S1017 and S1020 is “1UH”, “1CH”, or “1LH”, “1C” and “1C” among chance eyes A (1C to 40C) as shown in FIG. The chance eye A is determined using a table in which determination values are assigned to “9C”, “17C”, “25C”, and “33C”.

  In addition to the table shown in FIG. 59, the table corresponding to reach symbol “1WH” and the tables corresponding to reach symbols “2UH”, “2CH”, and “2LH” are included as the chance eye A selection table corresponding to reach symbols. , Table corresponding to reach symbol “2WH”, table corresponding to reach symbol “3UH” “3CH” “3LH”, table corresponding to reach symbol “3WH”, corresponding to reach symbol “4UH” “4CH” “4LH” Table, table corresponding to reach symbol “4WH”, table corresponding to reach symbol “5UH” “5CH” “5LH”, table corresponding to reach symbol “5WH”, reach symbol “6UH” “6CH” “6LH” , Table corresponding to reach design “6WH”, reach design “7UH” “7CH” “7 Table corresponding to H ", the table corresponding to Reach symbol" 7WH ", reach the symbol" 8UH "," 8CH "" table corresponding to 8LH ", a table corresponding to Reach symbol" 8WH "is provided.

  If it is not a variation pattern with a temporary stop of chance A (N in Step S1023), the production control microcomputer 100, based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in Step S617), It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance eye B (step S1026). When the chance eyes B are displayed as a temporary stop, in this embodiment, the chance eyes B are displayed as a temporary stop when the normal fluctuation is stopped, and then an effect of developing into super reach is executed. In this embodiment, when the chance eye B is displayed temporarily, the double reach super reach D is always developed.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance eye B (Y in step S1026), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1027). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye B using the chance eye B selection table (H-7) corresponding to the reach symbol shown in FIG. 60 according to the extracted random number value (step S1028). ). For example, when the reach symbol determined in step S1020 is “1WH”, “41C”, “48C”, “49C”, “56C”, “56C” among the chance eyes B (41C to 72C) as shown in FIG. The chance eyes B are determined using a table in which determination values are assigned to 57C, 64C, 65C, and 72C.

  In addition to the table shown in FIG. 60, the table corresponding to the reach symbol “3WH”, the table corresponding to the reach symbol “4WH”, and the reach symbol “5WH” as the chance eye B selection table corresponding to the reach symbol. , A table corresponding to the reach symbol “6WH”, a table corresponding to the reach symbol “7WH”, and a table corresponding to the reach symbol “8WH”.

  61 and 62 are flowcharts showing the first probability variation design determination process. The first probability variation design determination process is a process executed when a variation pattern command indicating variation patterns 20 to 61 shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 is received. The first probability variation design determination processing (processing to determine the decorative symbol to be derived and displayed as any probability variation symbol) is a probability variation big hit (no re-lottery effect) in step S62, that is, “probability variation 1” shown in FIG. It is executed when is determined.

  In the first probability variation design determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S1031). Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the relief effect is to be executed based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S1032). In the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the variation pattern in which “relief effect” is not executed is the variation pattern per probability variation.

  When the relief effect is not executed (N in step S1032), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern per probability variation. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the variation pattern (“S & W” in FIGS. 17 and 18) with a single / double reach based on the contents of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617). Is determined) (step S1033). As shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, only the normal reach is a single / double reach, and the super reach A to D is either a single reach or a double reach. If the variation pattern has a single / double common reach (Y in step S1033), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the common jackpot symbol selection table shown in FIG. 71 according to the random number value extracted in step S1031. The probability variation symbol is determined and stored using (F-2) (step S1034). Thereafter, the process ends.

  In the common big hit symbol selection table, among the big hit symbols shown in FIG. , 8CF, 1SF, 3SF, 5SF, 7SF, 8SF, 1AF, 3AF, 5AF, 7AF, 8AF). The production control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1031 as the probability variation symbol.

  In the common jackpot symbol selection table (F-2) shown in FIG. 71, the number of determination values assigned to each probability variation symbol is not uniform. Specifically, a relatively large number of judgment values are assigned to the probability variation symbols of the right-down line (SF) and the right-up line (AF), and the upper, middle, and lower horizontal lines (UF, LF, CF) Relatively few judgment values are assigned to the probabilistic symbols. Therefore, the rate of the probability variation pattern of the lower right line (SF) and the upper right line (AF) is determined higher than the probability variation pattern of the upper, middle and lower horizontal lines (UF, LF, CF). . In addition, in other jackpot symbol selection tables (F-1, F-3, F-4, F-7 to F-16, F-17, F-18), which will be described later, determinations distributed to each symbol. The number of values is uneven. Therefore, the ratio that a specific jackpot symbol is determined is higher than other jackpot symbols.

  In step S1033, when it is not the variation pattern with the single / double common reach (N in step S1033), the production control microcomputer 100 receives the content of the variation pattern command received (the variation pattern saved in step S617). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (a variation pattern having “S” in FIGS. 17 and 18) (step S1035). If the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (Y in step S1035), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1031, and the single jackpot symbol selection table (F-8) shown in FIG. ) Is used to determine and store a probability variation symbol (step S1036). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1043.

  In the single jackpot symbol selection table, the probability variation symbol of the single reach among the probability variation symbols (1UF, 3UF, 5UF, 7UF, 8UF, 1LF, 3LF, 5LF, 7LF, 8LF, 1CF, 3CF, 5CF, 7CF, 8CF) Multiple judgment values are assigned to. The production control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1031 as the probability variation symbol.

  In step S1035, when the variation pattern is not accompanied by a single reach (N in step S1035), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern is accompanied by a double reach. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 wins by the symbol that comes first in the double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617). It is determined whether or not the winning symbol is a winning symbol (step S1037). When it is a double tip (Y in step S1037), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1031, and the double tip jackpot symbol selection table (F-12) shown in FIG. Is used to determine and store a probable variation symbol (step S1038). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1040.

  In the double hit big hit symbol selection table, a plurality of judgment values are assigned to symbols (1SF, 3SF, 5SF, 7SF, 8SF) that are double wins among the probability variation symbols. The production control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1031 as the probability variation symbol.

  If it is a double after hit (N in Step S1037), the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the random value extracted in Step S1031, the double after hit big hit symbol selection table (F-16) shown in FIG. Is used to determine and store a probable variation symbol (step S1039). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1040.

  In the double hit big hit symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to symbols (1AF, 3AF, 5AF, 7AF, 8AF) which are double after hit among the probability variation symbols. The production control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1031 as the probability variation symbol.

  In step S1040, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the pattern is a variation pattern with a temporary stop of the chance eye B based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617). Step S1040). In this embodiment, when the chance eye B is displayed temporarily, the double reach super reach D is always developed.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance eye B (Y in step S1040), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1041). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye B using the chance eye B selection table (F-20) corresponding to the jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 89 according to the extracted random number value (step S1042). ). For example, when the jackpot symbol determined in steps S1038 and S1039 is “1AF” or “8SF”, “41C”, “48C” and “48C” among the chance eyes B (41C to 72C) as shown in FIG. The chance eye B is determined using a table in which determination values are assigned to 49C, 56C, 57C, 64C, 65C, and 72C. Then, the process ends.

  In addition to the table shown in FIG. 89, tables corresponding to each of the big hit symbols (such as “1SF” and “2AF”) are provided as the chance hit B selection table corresponding to the big hit symbol. That is, the chance eye B corresponding to the big hit symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  If the variation pattern is not accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance eye B (N in Step S1040), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (Step S1043). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol using the super-development middle symbol selection table (F-6) shown in FIG. 75 according to the extracted random number value (step S1044). Then, the process proceeds to step S1051.

  The medium symbol determined in step S1044 is a medium symbol that is displayed when developing into super reach in the middle of the fluctuation that becomes a big hit. Specifically, after the fluctuation starts and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are fluctuated at high speed, the left symbol and the middle symbol are stopped in order (temporary stop / fluctuation fluctuation) and develop into normal reach, and the middle symbol The speed is changed at a low speed, and then the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. The stop symbol of the middle symbol at this time is the middle symbol determined in step S1044. Thereafter, when the middle symbol is changed again at a high speed, the super-reach is developed. When the middle symbol is stopped, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined as the off symbol. The reach symbols at this time are the left and right symbols (left and right symbols of the left middle right probability variation symbols) constituting the probability variation symbols determined in steps S1036, S1038, and S1039.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the super development time symbol selection table is divided depending on whether the variation pattern is for single reach or double reach. In the super development time symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the symbol differences for the reach symbols determined in steps S1036, S1038, and S1039. Note that a determination value is not assigned to the symbol difference “0” with respect to the reach symbol. This is because determining the middle symbol of the symbol difference “0” results in a big hit. When double reach occurs, a determination value is not assigned to the symbol difference “−2” with respect to the reach symbol. This is because, when double reach occurs, determining the middle symbol of the symbol difference “−2” results in a big hit. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1043 as the middle symbol.

  In step S1032, when the relief effect is executed (Y in step S1032), the effect control microcomputer 100 first extracts a temporary stop symbol determining random number (step S1045). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the variation pattern has a single / double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S1046). ). As shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, only the normal reach is a single / double reach, and the super reach A to D is either a single reach or a double reach. If the variation pattern has a single / double common reach (Y in step S1046), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the common jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 73 according to the random number values extracted in steps S1031 and S1045. A temporary stop symbol and a final stop symbol are determined and stored using the selection table (F-4) (step S1047).

  Here, the “temporary stop symbol” refers to a symbol that is temporarily stopped before the relief effect is executed. Further, the “final stop symbol” refers to a symbol that is derived and displayed after the relief effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the common jackpot symbol selection table includes a table for determining the final stop symbol (final stop symbol table) and a table for determining the temporary stop symbol (here, the left and right symbols) (temporary symbol). Stop symbol table). In the final stop symbol table, the probability variation symbols (1UF, 3UF, 5UF, 7UF, 8UF, 1LF, 3LF, 5LF, 7LF, 8LF, 1CF, 3CF, 5CF, 7CF, 8CF, among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. (1SF, 3SF, 5SF, 7SF, 8SF, 1AF, 3AF, 5AF, 7AF, 8AF) are assigned a plurality of determination values. The temporary stop symbol table includes a table when the final stop symbol is “1UF” to “8UF”, a table when “1LF” to “8LF”, a table when “1CF” to “8CF”, The table is divided into a table for “1SF” to “8SF” and a table for “1AF” to “8AF”. In each table included in the temporary stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the same probability variable symbol as the non-probable variable symbol and the final stop symbol.

  The production control microcomputer 100 first determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1031 as the final stop symbol (probability variation symbol) using the final stop symbol table. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the temporary stop symbol table corresponding to the determined final stop symbol, and uses the temporary stop symbol (non-probable variable symbol or probable variable symbol) for the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1045. Design).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1048A). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol using the normal middle symbol temporary stop selection table (F-5) shown in FIG. 74 according to the extracted random number value (step S1048B).

  As shown in FIG. 74, the normal middle symbol temporary stop selection table is divided for each type of normal reach (normal 8 frames, normal 14 frames, normal 17 frames), and the temporary stop symbols determined in step S1047. It is divided according to single reach or double reach. In each table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the symbol differences (“−14” to “+1”) with respect to the temporary stop symbols determined in step S1047.

  In the normal middle symbol temporary stop selection table, no determination value is assigned to the symbol difference “0” with respect to the temporary stop symbol. This is because determining the middle symbol of the symbol difference “0” results in a big hit. In addition, in the normal middle symbol temporary stop selection table for double reach, no determination value is assigned to the symbol difference “−2” with respect to the temporary stop symbol. This is because if the medium symbol of the symbol difference “−2” is determined when double reach occurs, a big hit will occur. The production control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1048A as the middle symbol.

  For example, in step S1047, using the common jackpot symbol selection table (F-4), “1UF” is determined as the final stop symbol, “2UF” is determined as the temporary stop symbol, and in step S1048B, Assume that the symbol difference “−2” with respect to the reach symbol is determined using the normal middle symbol temporary stop selection table (F-5). In this case, the shifted pattern “212” (“***” in the middle line and “381” in the lower line) is temporarily stopped and displayed on the upper line. Then, the relief effect is executed, and the probability variation symbol “111” is derived and displayed on the upper line as the final stop symbol.

  In step S1046, if it is not a variation pattern with a single / double reach (N in step S1046), the production control microcomputer 100 receives the content of the variation pattern command received (the variation pattern saved in step S617). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (step S1049). When the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (Y in step S1049), the production control microcomputer 100 performs a single jackpot symbol selection table (shown in FIG. 79) according to the random number values extracted in steps S1031 and S1045 ( F-10) is used to determine and store a final stop symbol and a temporary stop symbol (step S1050). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1040.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the single jackpot symbol selection table includes a table for determining the final stop symbol (final stop symbol table) and a table for determining the temporary stop symbol (left and right symbols) (temporary stop symbol). Table). In the final stop symbol table, a probability variation symbol (1UF, 3UF, 5UF, 7UF, 8UF, 1LF, 3LF, 5LF, 7LF, 8LF, 1CF, 3CF, 5CF, which is a single reach among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. 7CF, 8CF) are assigned a plurality of determination values. The temporary stop symbol table is divided into a table when the final stop symbol is “1UF” to “8UF”, a table when “1LF” to “8LF”, and a table when “1CF” to “8CF”. It has been. In each table included in the temporary stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the same probability variable symbol as the non-probable variable symbol and the final stop symbol.

  The production control microcomputer 100 first determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1031 as the final stop symbol (probability variation symbol) using the final stop symbol table. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the temporary stop symbol table corresponding to the determined final stop symbol, and uses the temporary stop symbol (non-probable variable symbol or probable variable symbol) for the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1045. Design).

  Note that, in the super reach variation pattern for executing the relief effect, a symbol difference between the temporary stop symbol and the left and right symbols is designated. For example, the variation pattern of variation number “27” shown in FIG. 17 is “+1 relief”, which indicates that the symbol difference of the temporary stop symbol determined in step S1050 with respect to the left and right symbols is “+1”. Thus, the middle symbol of the temporary stop symbol is automatically determined based on the symbol difference designated by the variation pattern command. For example, when the temporary stop symbol is 2UF and the symbol difference specified by the variation pattern command is “+1”, the symbol “2 * 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the relief effect is executed, and the probability variation symbol which is the final stop symbol is derived and displayed.

  After the process in step S1050, it is determined in step S1040 that the chance eye B is not stopped (N in step S1040), and after performing the processes in steps S1043 and S1044 described above, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the received variation pattern. Based on the contents of the command (the variation pattern saved in step S617), it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance eye A (step S1051). When the chance eye A is temporarily stopped and displayed, in this embodiment, the chance eye A is temporarily stopped and displayed when the normal fluctuation is stopped, and then an effect of developing into super reach is executed.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance eye A (Y in step S1051), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1052). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye A using the chance eye A selection table (F-19) corresponding to the jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 88 according to the extracted random number value (step S1053). ). For example, when the jackpot symbol determined in steps S1036, S1038, S1039, S1050, S1055, and S1056 is “1UF”, “1CF”, or “1LF”, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. The chance eyes A are determined using a table in which determination values are assigned to “1C”, “9C”, “17C”, “25C”, and “33C” among (1C to 40C).

  In addition to the table shown in FIG. 88, the table corresponding to the jackpot symbols “1SF” and “2AF”, the jackpot symbols “2UF”, “2CF”, and “2LF” can be selected as the chance hit A selection table corresponding to the jackpot symbol. A table corresponding to each jackpot symbol, such as a corresponding table, is provided. That is, as the chance eye A, the chance eye corresponding to the big hit symbol is selected.

  In step S1049, when it is not a variation pattern with single reach (N in step S1049), the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern is with double reach. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 wins by the symbol that comes first in the double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617). It is determined whether or not the winning symbol is a winning symbol (step S1054). If it is a double hit (Y in step S1054), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in steps S1031 and S1045, and displays the double hit jackpot symbol selection table (F) shown in FIG. -14) is used to determine and store the temporary stop symbol and the final stop symbol (step S1055). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1040.

  As shown in FIG. 83, the table for selecting the big hit symbol for double tip is a table for determining the final stop symbol (final stop symbol table) and a table for determining the temporary stop symbol (left and right symbols) (temporary symbol). Stop symbol table). In the final stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the probability variation symbols (1SF, 3SF, 5SF, 7SF, 8SF) that are the double hits among the big hit symbols shown in FIG. As the temporary stop symbol table, only the table when the final stop symbol is “1SF” to “8SF” is set. In the temporary stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the same probability variable symbols as the non-probable variable symbol and the final stop symbol.

  The production control microcomputer 100 first determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1031 as the final stop symbol (probability variation symbol) using the final stop symbol table. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the temporary stop symbol table corresponding to the determined final stop symbol, and uses the temporary stop symbol (non-probable variable symbol or probable variable symbol) for the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1045. Design).

  Note that the middle symbol of the temporary stop symbol is automatically determined by the symbol difference specified by the variation pattern command. After the temporary stop symbol that is the reach failure symbol is displayed temporarily, the relief effect is executed, and the probability variation symbol that is the final stop symbol is derived and displayed.

  When it is a double winning hit (N in step S1054), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random winning value extracted in steps S1031 and S1045, and the double winning hit big hit symbol selection table (F -18) is used to determine and store the temporary stop symbol and the final stop symbol (step S1056). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1040.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the double rear hit big hit symbol selection table includes a table for determining the final stop symbol (final stop symbol table) and a table for determining the temporary stop symbol (left and right symbols) (temporary symbol). Stop symbol table). In the final stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the probability variation symbols (1AF, 3AF, 5AF, 7AF, 8AF) which are double hits among the big hit symbols shown in FIG. As the temporary stop symbol table, only the table when the final stop symbol is “1AF” to “8AF” is set. In the temporary stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the same probability variable symbols as the non-probable variable symbol and the final stop symbol.

  The production control microcomputer 100 first determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1031 as the final stop symbol (probability variation symbol) using the final stop symbol table. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the temporary stop symbol table corresponding to the determined final stop symbol, and uses the temporary stop symbol (non-probable variable symbol or probable variable symbol) for the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1045. Design).

  Note that the middle symbol of the temporary stop symbol is automatically determined by the symbol difference specified by the variation pattern command. After the temporary stop symbol that is the reach failure symbol is displayed temporarily, the relief effect is executed, and the probability variation symbol that is the final stop symbol is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the first non-probable variable symbol determination process. Note that the first non-probable variable symbol determination process is a process executed when a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern with variation numbers 85 to 88 shown in FIG. 18 is received. The first non-probable variable symbol determination process (a process for determining a decoration symbol to be derived and displayed as one of the non-probable variable symbols) is a normal big hit or a probable big hit (with re-drawing effect) in step S62, that is, FIG. 22 (C). This is executed when the “normal”, “probability variation 2”, and “probability variation 3” shown are determined.

  In the first non-probable variable symbol determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S1071). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the variation pattern has a single / double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S617). S1072). As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the normal reach is a single / double reach, and the super reach A and C is either a single reach or a double reach. If the variation pattern has a single / double common reach (Y in step S1072), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the common jackpot symbol selection table shown in FIG. 70 according to the random number extracted in step S1071. (F-1) is used to determine and store an uncertain variable symbol (step S1073). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1079.

  The common jackpot symbol selection table includes non-probable variation symbols (2UF, 2LF, 2CF, 2SF, 2AF, 4UF, 4LF, 4CF, 4SF, 4AF, 6UF, 6LF, 6CF, among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. 6SF, 6AF) are assigned a plurality of determination values. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1071 as the non-probable variation symbol.

  In step S1072, if it is not a fluctuation pattern with a single / double reach (N in step S1072), the production control microcomputer 100 receives the contents of the received fluctuation pattern command (the fluctuation pattern saved in step S617). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (step S1074). If the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (Y in step S1074), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1071 and displays a single jackpot symbol selection table (F-7) shown in FIG. ) Is used to determine and store a non-probable variation symbol (step S1075). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1079.

  In the single jackpot symbol selection table, a plurality of judgment values are allocated to single reach non-probable variation symbols (2UF, 4UF, 6UF, 2LF, 4LF, 6LF, 2CF, 4CF, 6CF) among non-probability variation symbols. . The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1071 as the non-probable variation symbol.

  In step S1074, when the variation pattern is not accompanied by a single reach (N in step S1074), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern is accompanied by a double reach. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 wins by the symbol that comes first in the double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617). It is determined whether or not the winning symbol is a winning symbol (step S1076). If it is a double tip (Y in step S1076), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1071 and displays a double tip jackpot symbol selection table (F-11) shown in FIG. Is used to determine and store a non-probable variable symbol (step S1077). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1079.

  In the double tip big hit symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to symbols (2SF, 4SF, 6SF) which are double tip among non-probability variable symbols. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1071 as the non-probable variation symbol.

  If it is a double hit (N in Step S1076), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in Step S1071 and displays a double hit jackpot symbol selection table (F-15) shown in FIG. Is used to determine and store a non-probable variation symbol (step S1078). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1079.

  In the double hit big hit symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to symbols (2AF, 4AF, 6AF) which are double after hits among non-probability variable symbols. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1071 as the non-probable variation symbol.

  In step S1079, the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1079). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol using the super-development middle symbol selection table (F-6) shown in FIG. 75 according to the extracted random number value (step S1080). When normal reach is executed (Y in step S1072), the processes in steps S1079 and S1080 are not executed.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a sudden probability variation design determination process. The sudden probability variation design determination process is a process executed when a variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern of the variation number 91 shown in FIG. 18 is received.

  In the sudden probability variation design determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S1081). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 suddenly determines and stores the probability variation symbol using the random symbol selection table (F-25) shown in FIG. 65 according to the extracted random number value (step S1082).

  In the accuracy symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are assigned substantially evenly to the sudden accuracy variation symbol (the chance item for accuracy) shown in FIG. The effect control microcomputer 100 suddenly determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the extracted random number value as the probability variation symbol.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the second decorative symbol determination process. In the second decorative symbol determination process, the production control microcomputer 100 first selects the normal jackpot designation command (8C01 (H)), the probability variation jackpot two designation command (8C03 (H)) or the received symbol information designation command. It is confirmed whether or not a 3 designation command (8C04 (H)) for probability variation is designated (step S671). When those contents are designated (Y in step S671), the production control microcomputer 100 indicates that the non-probable variation big hit has been determined (the big hit symbol at the time of stoppage of variation is the non-probable variable symbol). An uncertain variable big hit determination flag is set (step S672). Then, a second uncertain variable symbol determination process is executed (step S673). The detailed contents of the second non-probable variable symbol determination process will be described later (see FIGS. 67 and 68).

  When the symbol information designation command is not the normal jackpot designation command or the probability variation big hit 2, 3 designation command (N in step S671), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether the probability variation big hit 1 designation command (8C02 (H)). Is confirmed (step S674). If it is a command specifying one of the probable variation jackpots (Y in step S674), the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the probable variation jackpot has been determined (the jackpot symbol at the time when the fluctuation is stopped is the probability variation symbol). Is set (step S675). Then, the second probability variation design determination process is executed (step S676).

  If the symbol information designation command is not a probability variation jackpot 1 designation command (N in step S674), the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not it is a sudden probability variation jackpot designation command (8C05 (H)) (step S677). . If it is a sudden probability change big hit designation command (Y in step S677), the production control microcomputer 100 sets a sudden probability change big hit determination flag indicating that the sudden probability change big hit has been determined (step S678). Then, a sudden probability variation design determination process is executed (step S679). Note that the sudden probability variation design determination process in step S675 is the same process (subroutine) as the process described in step S663 of FIG. 43 and FIG.

  When the symbol information designation command is not suddenly a probable big hit designation command (N in step S677), the symbol information designation command is a small hit designation command. If it is a small hit designation command, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a small hit determination flag indicating that the small hit is determined (step S680A). Then, a small hit symbol determination process is executed (step S680B). Details of the small hit symbol determination process will be described later (see FIG. 90).

  67 and 68 are flowcharts showing the second non-probable variable symbol determination process. Note that the second non-probable variation symbol determination process receives a variation pattern command indicating variation patterns 62 to 84 (variation patterns for executing re-lottery effects) shown in FIG. This process is executed when a big hit designation command (8C01 (H)) or a probable big hit 2,3 designation command (8C03 (H), 8C04 (H)) is received. The second non-probable variable symbol determination process (a process for determining the decorative symbol to be derived and displayed as one of the non-probable variable symbols) is a normal big hit or a probable big hit (with re-drawing effect) in step S62, that is, FIG. 22 (C). This is executed when the “normal”, “probability variation 2”, and “probability variation 3” shown are determined.

  In the second non-probable variable symbol determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S1101). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the variation pattern has a single / double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S617). S1102). If the variation pattern has a single / double common reach (Y in step S1102), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the common jackpot symbol selection table shown in FIG. 70 according to the random number extracted in step S1101. (F-1) is used to determine and store an uncertain variable symbol (step S1103). Then, the process proceeds to step S1109. The re-lottery effect is executed during the fluctuation. In this embodiment, the temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect is executed is also derived and displayed after the re-lottery effect is executed. The final stop symbol is also the same non-probable variable determined in step S1103.

  In step S1102, if it is not a fluctuation pattern with a single / double common reach (N in step S1102), the production control microcomputer 100 receives the contents of the received fluctuation pattern command (the fluctuation pattern saved in step S617). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (step S1104). If the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (Y in step S1104), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1101 and displays a single jackpot symbol selection table (F-7) shown in FIG. ) Is used to determine and store a non-probable variation (step S1105). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1109. The re-lottery effect is executed during the fluctuation. In this embodiment, the temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect is executed is also derived and displayed after the re-lottery effect is executed. The final stop symbol is also the same non-probable variable determined in step S1105.

  In step S1104, when the variation pattern is not accompanied by a single reach (N in step S1104), the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern is accompanied by a double reach. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 wins by the symbol that comes first in the double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617). It is determined whether or not the winning symbol is a winning symbol (step S1106). If it is a double tip (Y in step S1106), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in step S1101, and the double tip jackpot symbol selection table (F-11) shown in FIG. Is used to determine and store a non-probable variable symbol (step S1107). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1109. The re-lottery effect is executed during the fluctuation. In this embodiment, the temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect is executed is also derived and displayed after the re-lottery effect is executed. The final stop symbol is also the same non-probable variable determined in step S1107.

  When it is a double hit (N in Step S1106), the production control microcomputer 100 follows the random value extracted in Step S1101 and displays a double after-hit big hit symbol selection table (F-15) shown in FIG. Is used to determine and store a non-probable variable symbol (step S1108). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1109. The re-lottery effect is executed during the fluctuation. In this embodiment, the temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect is executed is also derived and displayed after the re-lottery effect is executed. The final stop symbol is also the same non-probable variable determined in step S1108.

  In step S1109, the effect control microcomputer 100 designates that the symbol information designation command executes the re-lottery effect after the big hit and promotes the non-probable variation symbol to the probability variation symbol, that is, the probability variation big hit two designation command (8C03). (H)) or whether the command is a probability variation big three designation command (8C04 (H)) (step S1109). If it is a symbol information designation command that designates promotion after a big hit (Y in step S1109), the production control microcomputer 100 sets a re-lottery effect execution flag indicating that a re-lottery effect is executed after the big win ( Step S1110). If it is a command with 2 probable big hits, a re-lottery effect execution flag is set to indicate that a re-lottery effect is to be executed during the big win. Set an ending re-lottery effect execution flag indicating that the game is to be performed. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the probability variation symbol using the common jackpot symbol selection table (F-2) shown in FIG. 71 according to the random number value extracted in step S1101 (step S1111). The probability variation symbol determined in this way is a probability variation symbol derived and displayed in the re-lottery effect executed after the big hit game is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1112.

  In step S1112, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it is a variation pattern with a temporary stop of the chance eye B based on the content of the received variation pattern command (variation pattern saved in step S617) ( Step S1112). In this embodiment, when the chance eye B is displayed temporarily, the double reach super reach D is always developed.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance eye B (Y in step S1112), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1113). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye B using the chance eye B selection table (F-20) corresponding to the jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 89 according to the extracted random number value (step S1114). ). For example, when the jackpot symbol determined in steps S1107 and S1108 is “1AF” or “8SF”, “41C”, “48C”, “48C” of chance eyes B (41C to 72C) as shown in FIG. The chance eye B is determined using a table in which determination values are assigned to 49C, 56C, 57C, 64C, 65C, and 72C. Then, the process ends.

  If the variation pattern is not accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance eye B (N in step S1112), the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1115). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbols using the super development middle symbol selection table (F-6) shown in FIG. 75 according to the extracted random number value (step S1116).

  The middle symbol determined in step S1116 is a middle symbol that is displayed when developing to super reach in the middle of a big hit, like the middle symbol determined in step S1044. The reach symbols at this time are the left and right symbols (the left and right symbols of the non-probable variable symbol in the left middle right) constituting the non-probable variable symbols determined in steps S1105, S1107, and S1108.

  When the variation pattern has a reach that is common to both single and double (Y in step S1102), that is, when the variation pattern has a normal reach, the chance pattern A and the chance index B are stopped by the variation pattern command. Is not designated and does not develop into super reach (see FIGS. 17 and 18), it is not necessary to execute the processing of steps S1112 to S1119. Therefore, if the variation pattern is accompanied by normal reach, the process may be terminated without shifting to the process of step S1112 after the processes of steps S1109 to S1111 are executed.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it is a variation pattern with a temporary stop of the chance eye A based on the contents of the received variation pattern command (variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S617). S1117). When the chance eye A is temporarily stopped and displayed, in this embodiment, the chance eye A is temporarily stopped and displayed when the normal fluctuation is stopped, and then an effect of developing into super reach is executed.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance A (Y in step S1117), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1118). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye A using the chance eye A selection table (F-19) corresponding to the jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 88 according to the extracted random number value (step S1119). ). For example, when the jackpot symbol determined in steps S1105, S1107, and S1108 is “1UF”, “1CF”, or “1LF”, the chance eye A (1C to 40C) as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 88 is displayed. Of these, a chance eye A is determined using a table in which determination values are assigned to “1C”, “9C”, “17C”, “25C”, and “33C”. Thereafter, the process ends.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the second probability variation design determination process. The second probability variation symbol determination process receives a variation pattern command indicating variation patterns 62 to 84 (variation patterns for executing re-lottery effects) shown in FIG. This process is executed when a 1 designation command (8C02 (H)) is received. The second probability variation design determination processing (processing to determine the decorative symbol derived and displayed as any probability variation symbol) is a probability variation big hit (no re-drawing effect) in step S62, that is, “probability variation 1” shown in FIG. It is executed when is determined.

  In the second probability variation symbol determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S1130). Then, a temporary stop symbol determining random number is extracted (step S1131). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the variation pattern has a single / double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S617). S1132). As shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, only the normal reach is a single / double reach, and the super reach A to D is either a single reach or a double reach. If the variation pattern has a single / double common reach (Y in step S1132), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the common jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 72 according to the random number values extracted in steps S1130 and S1131. The temporary stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined and stored using the selection table (F-3) (step S1133). Thereafter, the process ends.

  Here, the “temporary stop symbol” refers to a non-probable variable symbol that is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect is executed. Further, the “final stop symbol” refers to a probability variation symbol that is derived and displayed after the re-lottery effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the common jackpot symbol selection table includes a table for determining a final stop symbol (final stop symbol table) and a table for determining a temporary stop symbol (temporary stop symbol table). Is provided. In the final stop symbol table, the probability variation symbols (1UF, 3UF, 5UF, 7UF, 8UF, 1LF, 3LF, 5LF, 7LF, 8LF, 1CF, 3CF, 5CF, 7CF, 8CF, among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. (1SF, 3SF, 5SF, 7SF, 8SF, 1AF, 3AF, 5AF, 7AF, 8AF) are assigned a plurality of determination values. The temporary stop symbol table includes a table when the final stop symbol is “1UF” to “8UF”, a table when “1LF” to “8LF”, a table when “1CF” to “8CF”, The table is divided into a table for “1SF” to “8SF” and a table for “1AF” to “8AF”. In each table included in the temporary stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the non-probable variable symbols.

  First, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the final stop symbol table to determine the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1130 as the final stop symbol (probability variation symbol). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the temporary stop symbol table corresponding to the determined final stop symbol as the temporary stop symbol (non-probable variable symbol) for the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1131. decide.

  In step S1132, if it is not a variation pattern with a single / double common reach (N in step S1132), the production control microcomputer 100 receives the content of the variation pattern command received (variation pattern saved in step S617). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (step S1134). If the variation pattern is accompanied by a single reach (Y in step S1134), the production control microcomputer 100 performs a single jackpot symbol selection table (shown in FIG. 78) according to the random number values extracted in steps S1130 and S1131. The temporary stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined and stored using F-9) (step S1135). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1139.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the single jackpot symbol selection table includes a table for determining the final stop symbol (final stop symbol table) and a table for determining the temporary stop symbol (temporary stop symbol table). Is provided. In the final stop symbol table, a probability variation symbol (1UF, 3UF, 5UF, 7UF, 8UF, 1LF, 3LF, 5LF, 7LF, 8LF, 1CF, 3CF, 5CF, which is a single reach among the jackpot symbols shown in FIG. 7CF, 8CF) are assigned a plurality of determination values. The temporary stop symbol table is divided into a table when the final stop symbol is “1UF” to “8UF”, a table when “1LF” to “8LF”, and a table when “1CF” to “8CF”. It has been. In each table included in the temporary stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the non-probable variable symbols.

  First, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the final stop symbol table to determine the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1130 as the final stop symbol (probability variation symbol). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the temporary stop symbol table corresponding to the determined final stop symbol as the temporary stop symbol (non-probable variable symbol) for the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1131. decide.

  In step S1134, when the variation pattern is not a single reach (N in step S1134), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern is a double reach. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 wins by the symbol that comes first in the double reach based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617). It is determined whether or not the winning symbol is a winning symbol (step S1136). When it is a double front end (Y in step S1136), the production control microcomputer 100 determines the double front end jackpot symbol selection table (F) shown in FIG. 82 according to the random number values extracted in steps S1130 and S1131. -13) is used to determine and store the temporary stop symbol and the final stop symbol (step S1137). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1139.

  As shown in FIG. 82, the double-first hit big hit symbol selection table includes a table for determining the final stop symbol (final stop symbol table) and a table for determining the temporary stop symbol (temporary stop symbol table). And are provided. In the final stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the probability variation symbols (1SF, 3SF, 5SF, 7SF, 8SF) that are the double hits among the big hit symbols shown in FIG. As the temporary stop symbol table, only the table when the final stop symbol is “1SF” to “8SF” is set. In the temporary stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to non-probable variation symbols.

  First, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the final stop symbol table to determine the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1130 as the final stop symbol (probability variation symbol). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the temporary stop symbol table corresponding to the determined final stop symbol as the temporary stop symbol (non-probable variable symbol) for the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1131. decide.

  When it is a double winning hit (N in step S1136), the effect control microcomputer 100 follows the double winning hit bonus symbol selection table (F) shown in FIG. 86 according to the random number values extracted in steps S1130 and S1131. -17) is used to determine and store the temporary stop symbol and the final stop symbol (step S1138). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1139.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the double rear hit big hit symbol selection table includes a table for determining the final stop symbol (final stop symbol table) and a table for determining the temporary stop symbol (temporary stop symbol table). And are provided. In the final stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to the probability variation symbols (1AF, 3AF, 5AF, 7AF, 8AF) which are double hits among the big hit symbols shown in FIG. As the temporary stop symbol table, only the table when the final stop symbol is “1AF” to “8AF” is set. In the temporary stop symbol table, a plurality of determination values are assigned to non-probable variation symbols.

  First, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the final stop symbol table to determine the symbol of the determination value that matches the random number extracted in step S1130 as the final stop symbol (probability variation symbol). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the temporary stop symbol table corresponding to the determined final stop symbol, and uses the temporary stop symbol (non-probable variable symbol) as the symbol of the determination value that matches the random value extracted in step S1031. decide.

  In step S1139, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it is a variation pattern with a temporary stop of the chance eye B based on the content of the received variation pattern command (the variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S1139). Step S1139). In this embodiment, when the chance eye B is displayed temporarily, the double reach super reach D is always developed.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance eye B (Y in step S1139), the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1140). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye B using the chance eye B selection table (F-20) corresponding to the jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 89 according to the extracted random number value (step S1141). ).

  If the variation pattern is not accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance eye B (N in step S1139), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a medium symbol determination random number (step S1142). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the middle symbol using the super-development middle symbol selection table (F-6) shown in FIG. 75 according to the extracted random number value (step S1143).

  The middle symbol determined in step S1143 is a middle symbol displayed when the game becomes a super reach in the middle of the big hit.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it is a variation pattern with a temporary stop of the chance eye A based on the contents of the received variation pattern command (variation pattern saved in step S617) (step S617). S1144). When the chance eye A is temporarily stopped and displayed, in this embodiment, the chance eye A is temporarily stopped and displayed when the normal fluctuation is stopped, and then an effect of developing into super reach is executed.

  If the variation pattern is accompanied by a temporary stop of the chance eye A (Y in step S1144), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a chance eye determination random number (step S1145). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the chance eye A using the chance eye A selection table (F-19) corresponding to the jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 88 according to the extracted random number value (step S1146). ). Then, the process ends.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a small hit symbol determination process. The small hit symbol determination process is performed when a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern of variation numbers 89 and 90 shown in FIG. 18 is received and a small hit designation command (8C06 (H)) is received as a symbol information designation command. It is a process to be executed.

  In the small hit symbol determining process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a big hit symbol determining random number (step S1161). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores the small hit symbol using the small bonus symbol selection table (K-1) shown in FIG. 91 according to the extracted random number value (step S1162).

  In the small hit symbol selection table, a plurality of determination values are allocated substantially evenly to the small hit symbols (small hit chance chances) shown in FIG. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol of the determination value that matches the extracted random number value as the small hit symbol.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing provisional determination symbol determination processing (step S632). In the temporary determination symbol determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S681). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether the variation pattern command is a variation pattern command for both a normal big hit / probability variation big hit or a sudden variation variation command for a sudden probability variation big hit / small hit (step S682).

  When the variation pattern command is a variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probability variation jackpot (Y in step S682), the production control microcomputer 100 uses the common jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 70 according to the random number value extracted in step S681. Using the selection table (F-1), the uncertain variable symbol is tentatively determined and stored (step S683). On the other hand, if the variation pattern command is a variation pattern command for both sudden and promiscuous large hit / small hit (N in step S682), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the small change shown in FIG. 91 according to the random number value extracted in step S681. A small winning symbol is temporarily determined and stored using the winning symbol selection table (K-1) (step S684).

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a command non-reception flag indicating that the symbol information designation command has not been received (step S685).

  In the above provisionally determined symbol determination process, the non-probable variable symbol is determined using the common jackpot symbol selection table shown in FIG. 70. However, the table for determining the non-probable variable symbol is variable. Based on the contents of the pattern command, the common jackpot symbol selection table shown in FIG. 70, the single jackpot symbol selection table shown in FIG. 76, the double hit jackpot symbol selection table shown in FIG. 80, and shown in FIG. You may make it use the jackpot symbol selection table for double rear hits properly. Further, in the above tentatively determined symbol determination process, the chance eye A and the chance eye using the chance eye A selection table (FIG. 88) and the chance eye B selection table (FIG. 89) according to the contents of the variation pattern command. The process of selecting and displaying B or determining and displaying the medium symbol during super-reach development using the super-development symbol selection table (FIG. 75) may be executed.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the third probability variation design determination process (step S637). In the third probability variation symbol determination process, the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot symbol determination random number (step S691). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines and stores a probable variation symbol using the common jackpot symbol selection table (F-2) shown in FIG. 71 according to the random number value (step S692). The probability variation symbol determined in this way is a probability variation symbol derived and displayed in the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game.

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process. In the effect control process, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs one of steps S800 to S808 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not an effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) specifying a fluctuation pattern has been received by the command reception interrupt process. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern reception flag indicating that a variation pattern command has been received is set. The variation pattern reception flag is set in step S618 in the command analysis process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Decoration symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the ornament symbol is started. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time is set in the variation time timer, the process table to be used is selected, and the process timer set value set at the beginning of the process table is set in the process timer.

  Decoration symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time.

  Decoration symbol variation stop process (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the ornament symbol and to derive and display the stop symbol (definite symbol) in response to the time-out of the variation time timer.

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, the big hit display is controlled. For example, when a fanfare command designating the start of a big hit is received, a fanfare effect is executed. Also, when a fanfare command designating sudden start of a probable big hit is received, a two-round effect is executed.

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. For example, when a command for opening a special prize opening indicating that the special prize opening is open is received, display control of the number of rounds is performed. A re-lottery effect may be executed during a predetermined round. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the round in which the re-drawing effect is executed is determined in advance (for example, 7 rounds or 15 rounds).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a command after opening the big prize opening indicating that the special prize opening is after being opened (closed) is received, an interval display or the like is performed.

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): Control of the big hit end display after the big hit game ends. For example, when an ending command specifying the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed. Note that a re-lottery effect may be executed during the ending effect.

  Small hit effect processing (step S808): After receiving the fanfare command designating the start of the small hit after the end of the variation time, the two round effect, which is the effect during the small hit, is executed.

  FIG. 95 is a timing chart showing the development timing of reach and relief effects. As shown in FIG. 95, only the “normal fluctuation” is performed in the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation (the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 1 in FIG. 17). Specifically, when the decoration pattern starts to change, the fluctuation speed is gradually increased from the state in which the left, middle, and right decoration patterns are stopped, and the fluctuation is performed for a predetermined time while the fluctuation speed becomes high, After that, for example, the fluctuating speed is lowered in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and the decorative symbol is stopped. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern of the short-time normal fluctuation (the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 2 in FIG. 17) has only a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation (variation pattern of fluctuation number 1 in FIG. 17). For example, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation (the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 1 in FIG. 17) is 8 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of the short-time normal fluctuation (variation pattern of fluctuation number 2 in FIG. 17) is 4. Seconds.

  In this embodiment, not only the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation without the reach but also the fluctuation pattern with the reach is a normal fluctuation (high-speed fluctuation of the left middle right decorative pattern) in a predetermined period (for example, 8 seconds) from the start of the fluctuation. And then develop into normal reach. That is, in the variation pattern with normal reach (variation patterns of variation numbers 3 to 6, 20 to 22 and 85 in FIGS. 17 and 18), after “normal variation” is performed for a predetermined period, the left and right symbols are aligned and reach. , “Normal reach” changes. It should be noted that the period during which the “normal reach” change is executed differs depending on the number of frames in which the middle symbol proceeds after the occurrence of normal reach. “Number of frames” is specified by a variation pattern command.

  In this embodiment, not only the fluctuation pattern with normal reach but also the fluctuation pattern with super reach, the “normal fluctuation” is performed for a predetermined period after the “normal fluctuation” is performed for a predetermined period, and then the super reach is performed. Develop. That is, in the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation patterns of fluctuation numbers 7, 8, 26, 28, 29, and 86 in FIGS. 17 and 18) accompanied by super reach A (also referred to as reach 1-1), the “normal fluctuation” is a predetermined period. After being performed (for example, 8 seconds), the variation of “normal reach” is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds), and then developed into “super reach A” and the variation of “super reach A” is performed. Further, even in a fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach B (also referred to as reach 2-1) (variation patterns of fluctuation numbers 9 to 10, 32, 34, and 35 in FIGS. 17 and 18), “normal fluctuation” is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 8 seconds), the “normal reach” change is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds), and the “super reach B” is developed to change the “super reach B”. As shown in FIG. 95, the period in which the “super reach B” variation is executed is longer than the period in which the “super reach A” variation is performed. In addition, “Super Reach A” and “Super Reach B” are executed in different ways (see FIGS. 111 and 113). Although not shown in FIG. 95, a fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach C (variation patterns of fluctuation numbers 12, 13, 39, 40, 43, 87, 88 in FIGS. 17 and 18) and super reach D are accompanied. Similarly, for the variation pattern (variation patterns of variation numbers 15, 16, 49, 51, 52, and 54 in FIGS. 17 and 18), after “normal variation” is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 8 seconds), “ The variation of “normal reach” is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds), and the variation of “super reach C” or “super reach D” is performed by developing into “super reach C” or “super reach D”.

  In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the stop of the chance item A or B (variation numbers 11, 14, 17 to 19, 37, 45, 46, 54, 56, 57, 59, FIG. 17 and FIG. 18). 60 fluctuation patterns), after the “normal fluctuation” is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 8 seconds), the chance item A or B stops, and thereafter, “super reach B”, “super reach C” or “ Develop into one of “Super Reach D”. In this case, “normal reach” is not changed. Alternatively, after the “normal fluctuation” is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 8 seconds), the chance eyes A or B are stopped, and thereafter, the normal fluctuation is performed, and the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped in order to “super reach B”. , Develop either “Super Reach C” or “Super Reach D”. Also in this case, “normal reach” is not changed. Alternatively, after the “normal fluctuation” is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 8 seconds), the chance eyes A or B are stopped, and then the normal fluctuation is performed, and the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped in order to develop normal reach. Thereafter, it is developed into one of “super reach B”, “super reach C”, and “super reach D” at the timing of changing the middle symbol again. In this case, fluctuation of “normal reach” is performed.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern with super reach including the relief effect is performed after the super reach variation is performed for a predetermined period (the same predetermined period as the super reach variation period when the relief effect is not performed). Production is performed. That is, in the variation pattern with the super reach A including the relief effect (the variation pattern of the variation numbers 27, 30, and 31 in FIG. 17), the reach of the “super reach A” is performed after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The lost symbol is displayed in a temporary stop, and then the relief effect is executed, and the big hit symbol (probability variation symbol in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed. Further, even in a variation pattern with a super reach B including a relief effect (a variation pattern of variation numbers 33, 36, and 38 in FIG. 17), the reach after the variation of “super reach B” is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 13 seconds). The lost symbol is displayed in a temporary stop, and then the relief effect is executed, and the big hit symbol (probability variation symbol in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed. Although not shown in FIG. 95, a variation pattern with super reach C (variation patterns of variation numbers 41, 42, 44, 47, and 48 in FIG. 17) and a variation pattern with super reach D (the variation in FIG. 18). Similarly, with respect to the fluctuation patterns of numbers 50, 53, 55, 58, and 61), the reach is shifted after the fluctuation of “super reach C” or “super reach D” is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 15 seconds, 17 seconds). The symbol is temporarily stopped and then a relief effect is executed, and the jackpot symbol (probability variation symbol in this embodiment) is stopped and displayed.

  Although not shown in FIG. 95, in this embodiment, after the fluctuation of “normal reach” is performed for a predetermined period, the reach-removed symbol is displayed temporarily, and after that, the relief effect is executed and the jackpot symbol (this In the embodiment, there is also provided a variation pattern (variation patterns of variation numbers 23 to 25 in FIG. 17) in which the probability variation symbol) is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 96 is a timing chart showing the variation timing in the variation pattern with normal reach. In the fluctuation pattern with normal reach, “normal fluctuation” is first performed. That is, the fluctuation speed is gradually increased from the state in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped, and the fluctuation is performed for a predetermined time while the fluctuation speed is high. First, the fluctuation speed becomes low from two frames before the left symbol is the left symbol, and the fluctuation is started by stopping at the stop symbol. Next, the fluctuation speed becomes low from two frames before the right symbol is the stop symbol, and the fluctuation is started at the stop symbol. At this time, reach is established when the left and right symbols stop at the same symbol, and normal reach variation starts. Lastly, a predetermined frame with a middle symbol as a stop symbol (the number of frames in which the middle symbol proceeds (varies) after the normal reach specified by the variation pattern occurs, for example, “8 frames” in the variation pattern with variation number 3)) The fluctuation speed becomes low and stops at the stop symbol. The time until the medium symbol fluctuation speed changes from high speed to low speed is the same for each fluctuation pattern (3 to 6, 20 to 25, 62 to 64, 85), but the number of frames to be advanced after the middle symbol becomes low speed. Therefore, the period during which the normal reach variation is executed varies depending on the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 96, when normal fluctuation and normal reach fluctuation are performed, the background color of the background image on the display screen of the variable display device 9 is always the same color (for example, blue) and does not change. Note that the variation mode of the variation pattern with normal reach will be described in detail later (see FIG. 110).

  FIG. 97 is a timing chart showing the variation timing in the variation pattern with super reach (super A or super B). Even in a fluctuation pattern with super reach, “normal fluctuation” is first performed. That is, the fluctuation speed is gradually increased from the state in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped, and the fluctuation is performed for a predetermined time while the fluctuation speed is high. First, the fluctuation speed becomes low from two frames before the left symbol is the left symbol, and the fluctuation is started by stopping at the stop symbol. Next, the fluctuation speed becomes low from two frames before the right symbol is the stop symbol, and the fluctuation is started at the stop symbol. At this time, reach is established when the left and right symbols stop at the same symbol, and normal reach variation starts. Then, the fluctuation speed becomes low from a predetermined frame before the temporary stop symbol (for example, 12 frames before the temporary stop symbol), and the middle symbol temporarily stops at the temporary stop symbol, and the fluctuation of fluctuation is performed.

  In this embodiment, the temporary stop symbol of the middle symbol is the symbol of the next frame of the reach symbol (left and right symbols) in the case of the variation pattern at the time of losing, and lottery (step S1044) in the case of the big hit variation pattern. From the symbol 14 frames before the reach symbol determined in S1080, S1116, S1143), the symbol is one of the symbols next to the symbol. For example, in the case of a fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation, the left symbol and the right symbol are aligned on the middle effective line with the same symbol “7” and the reach is established (in the case of “7CH”), the temporary pattern is temporarily displayed on the effective line. The temporary stop symbol of the middle symbol to be stopped is the blank symbol “*” for the next frame of “7”. In other words, the middle symbol “7” that constitutes the jackpot symbol in combination with the reach symbol (left and right symbols) is the stop position on the active line (the position of the jackpot symbol: for example “7CH”, the middle row position) one frame. Stop temporarily after passing. In addition, even in the case of a variation pattern at the time of big hit, even if the temporary stop symbol of the middle symbol is determined to be the next symbol of the reach symbol by lottery, the left symbol and the right symbol are on the middle effective line When reach is achieved with the same symbol “7” (in the case of “7CH”), the temporary stop symbol of the middle symbol that temporarily stops on the active line becomes the blank symbol “*” for the next frame of “7”. . Also, in the case of a variation pattern at the time of a loss, any one of the symbols next to the symbol from the symbol 14 frames before the reach symbol may be determined by lottery as the temporary stop symbol of the middle symbol. Alternatively, even in the case of a variation pattern at the time of a big hit, the temporary stop symbol of the middle symbol may be automatically set as the next symbol of the reach symbol.

  Thereafter, the middle symbol fluctuates for a short time and then starts to fluctuate again. The timing at which the medium symbol once temporarily stopped in this way starts to change again is the “timing to develop into super reach”. When re-variation of the middle symbol is started, the variation speed is increased and high-speed variation is performed. When the normal variation and the normal reach variation are performed, the background color of the background image on the display screen of the variable display device 9 is blue, but the background color is changed from blue to black at the timing when the medium symbol is re-varied. To change. In addition, the sound effect (fluctuating sound) and the lamp / LED lighting mode (lighting pattern) also change at this timing. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the game has evolved into super reach.

  Then, after high-speed fluctuation is performed for a predetermined period, the background color of the background image changes from black to red (which may be different depending on the fluctuation pattern (super reach A to D)), and then the player is expected to win a big hit. Production of tilting action to be held is executed. The direction of the tilt movement differs between Super Reach A and Super Reach B. The effect of the tilting operation in the variation pattern with super reach A and B will be described in detail later (see FIGS. 111 and 113).

  In the above example, after the normal reach variation starts, the variation rate of the middle symbol is reduced from the symbol before the temporary stop symbol by a fixed number of frames (for example, the symbol 12 frames before the temporary stop symbol). However, the fluctuation speed may be reduced from the symbol before the temporary stop symbol by an arbitrary number of frames determined by lottery. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may determine the number of frames that the middle symbol advances after the normal reach is established based on a predetermined random number, or in the same manner as the variation pattern of the outlier normal reach. The game control microcomputer 560 may determine the number of frames that the medium symbol advances after normal reach is established based on a predetermined random number, and specify the determined number of frames with a variation pattern command.

  Further, in the above example, the timing at which the temporarily stopped temporary symbol starts to change again is set as “timing to develop into super reach”. However, it is not limited to such a case. For example, the symbol for starting re-variation may not be the middle symbol (final stop symbol), but may be another symbol (first stop symbol or second stop symbol). The symbol of may be changed again. Also, when developing to super reach, the middle symbol was temporarily stopped and then changed again, but the fluctuation rate of the middle symbol was temporarily reduced, and the speed was then increased again without temporarily stopping the middle symbol. Then, you may make it develop into super reach. In this case, the timing at which the fluctuating speed once reduced is increased again is “timing to develop into super reach”. Furthermore, the timing at which effects such as “background image”, “illuminant” such as lamp / LED, and “sound effect” change may be set as “timing to develop into super reach”. Thus, the “timing to develop into super reach” is a timing at which at least one of a variation speed of a predetermined symbol and a rendering mode in a predetermined rendering device changes in a manner that can be recognized by the player. Is defined.

  In addition, as a specific example in which the symbol for starting re-variation is a symbol (second stop symbol) other than the middle symbol (final stop symbol), after the normal variation is performed for a predetermined period, It stops at “7”, the right symbol stops at “3”, and the middle symbol stops at “7” (“773” at this time). Then, the right symbol re-varies and develops into a super reach, and a tilt effect is executed in the super reach whether or not the right symbol stops at “7” (whether or not it is a big hit). In addition, as a specific example in which the symbol for starting re-variation is a symbol other than the middle symbol (final stop symbol) (first stop symbol), after the normal variation is performed for a predetermined period, It stops at “7”, the right symbol stops at “3”, and the middle symbol stops at “3” (at this time “733”). Then, the left symbol re-varies and develops into a super reach, and a tilt effect is executed in the super reach whether or not the left symbol stops at “3” (whether or not it is a big hit).

  FIG. 98 is a timing chart showing variation timings in a variation pattern with super reach including a relief effect (super reach A or super reach B including a relief effect). Even in a variation pattern with super reach including a relief effect, “normal variation” is first performed. That is, the fluctuation speed is gradually increased from the state in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped, and the fluctuation is performed for a predetermined time while the fluctuation speed is high. First, the fluctuation speed becomes low from two frames before the left symbol is the left symbol, and the fluctuation is started by stopping at the stop symbol. Next, the fluctuation speed becomes low from two frames before the right symbol is the stop symbol, and the fluctuation is started at the stop symbol. At this time, reach is established when the left and right symbols stop at the same symbol, and normal reach variation starts. Then, the fluctuation speed becomes low from a predetermined frame before the temporary stop symbol (for example, 12 frames before the temporary stop symbol), and the middle symbol temporarily stops at the temporary stop symbol, and the fluctuation of fluctuation is performed. As described above, in this embodiment, the temporary stop symbol of the middle symbol is one of the symbols next to the first frame from 14 frames before the reach symbol.

  Thereafter, the middle symbol fluctuates for a short time and then starts to fluctuate again. When the medium symbol re-variation is started and the super reach variation is started, the variation rate is increased and high-speed variation is performed. In addition, the background color on the display screen of the variable display device 9 changes from blue to black at the timing when the middle symbol is re-varied.

  Then, after the high-speed fluctuation is performed for a predetermined period and the background color of the background image changes from black to red, the effect of the tilt operation that causes the player to have a big hit expectation is executed. The direction of the tilt movement differs between Super Reach A and Super Reach B. After the tilt operation, the symbol that is not a symbol that constitutes the jackpot symbol in combination with the reach symbol (the symbol corresponding to the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol specified by the variation pattern, specifically two frames before the reach symbol, One frame before, one frame, two frames, etc .; for example, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 30 of “−1 relief”, when the reach symbol is “7”, symbol “6”) is the middle symbol As a temporary stop. When this symbol is determined as the stop symbol, the reach deviation is determined. However, in the case of a variation based on the variation pattern including the relief effect, the relief effect is executed without determining the stop symbol. At this time, the background color of the background image changes from red to rainbow (rainbow). In the relief effect, the lost-reach symbol is replaced with a jackpot symbol (for example, when the reach symbol is “7”, the middle symbol “6” is replaced with “7”), and the jackpot is determined. Relief effects differ between Super Reach A and Super Reach B. The effect mode of the relief effect will be described in detail later (see FIGS. 112 and 114).

  In the case of fluctuation in a fluctuation pattern including a re-drawing effect during fluctuation, after a non-probability variable symbol is temporarily displayed as a jackpot symbol, a non-probable symbol is expected to be promoted to a non-probable symbol, A probability variation symbol or a probability variation symbol is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 99 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data describes each variation mode constituting the variation pattern. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the change mode. The effect control microcomputer 100 refers to the process table, and performs control for variably displaying the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  Similarly to the control based on the display control execution data, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the lighting state of various lamps based on the lamp control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and the sound number Data is output to the audio output board 70.

  For example, the normal reach variation pattern includes process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data) for executing normal variation and process data for executing normal reach variation, In the case of the reach fluctuation pattern, the process data for executing the normal fluctuation, the process data for executing the normal reach fluctuation, and the process data for executing the predetermined super reach fluctuation are included, and the relief effect is included. In the case of the super reach variation pattern, the process data for executing the normal variation, the process data for executing the normal reach variation, the process data for executing the predetermined super reach variation, and the predetermined relief effect are executed. Including lottery process data In the case of a variation pattern of super reach including process data for executing normal variation, process data for executing variation of normal reach, process data for executing variation of predetermined super reach, and predetermined re-drawing effect And process data for executing.

  The process data shown in FIG. 99 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern. In this embodiment, as will be described later, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is selected (see step S821), and the rendering device is according to the process data set in the selected process table. (Step S823, etc.), but in the effect mode to be executed next when the process data is switched (for example, which super reach is executed, the relief effect is executed, or the re-lottery effect is executed) The corresponding process data may be selected (see step S835 or the like), and the rendering device may be controlled according to the selected process data.

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S811). If it has been set, the flag is reset (step S812). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the variation pattern of the decorative design based on the contents (variation number, variation time) designated by the variation pattern command (step S813). Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S814).

  FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first selects process data corresponding to the decorative symbol variation pattern to be used (step S821). Then, the process timer set value in the selected process data 1 is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S822). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the production device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step S823). For example, a control signal is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the variable display device 9. In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform lighting / extinguishing control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In addition, when displaying the temporary stop symbol of the decorative symbol at a predetermined timing during the change, control is performed to temporarily display the temporary stop symbol of the decorative symbol stored in the command analysis process.

  Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 starts a variation time timer (a timer according to the variation time of the decorative symbol) (step S824), and the value of the effect control process flag indicates the decorative symbol variation process (step S802). The value is updated (step S825).

  FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the decorative symbol variation process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation processing, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the variation time timer has timed out (step S831). If the variation time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value indicating the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S838).

  If the variation time timer has not timed out, the production control microcomputer 100 decrements the process timer by 1 (step S832) and decrements the variation time timer by 1 (step S833). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes control of the effect device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data n (step S834). In addition, the microcomputer 100 for effect control of the effect device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the content of the process data (process data including the re-draw effect) for executing the re-draw effect. By executing the control, the re-drawing effect during the change is executed.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S835). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S836). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S837).

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the decorative symbol variation stopping process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation stop process, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not an effect control command (decorative symbol stop designation command) instructing the decorative symbol variation stop is received (step S841). If the decorative symbol stop designation command has been received, control is performed to stop and display the decorative symbol stop symbol stored in the command analysis process (step S842).

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control to stop and display the decorative symbols in response to the reception of the decorative symbol stop designation command from the game control microcomputer 560. The present invention is not limited to this, and control for stopping and displaying decorative symbols may be performed based on the time-up of the variable time timer.

  When the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in step S842 is a small hit symbol (Y in step S843), the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the small hit fanfare reception flag is set. (Step S844). When the small hit fanfare reception flag is set (Y in step S844), the production control microcomputer 100 executes the contents of the stored fanfare command and the contents of the stored variation pattern (the time mission entry effect is executed). 2 rounds production (2 rounds production according to the time mission rush production, sudden rounds / small hit common rush production) (Production) is selected (step S845). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects process data corresponding to the selected 2-round production (step S846). Then, the process timer is started (step S847), and the 2R effect time timer for measuring the execution time of the 2-round effect is started (step S848). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit effect process (step S808) (step S849).

  When the stop symbol of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in step S842 is not a big hit symbol but a big hit symbol (non-probable variation symbol, probability variation symbol, sudden probability variation symbol) (Y in step S850), the production control microcomputer 100 performs Then, it is confirmed whether or not the fanfare reception flag is set (step S851). When the fanfare reception flag is set (Y in step S851), the effect control microcomputer 100 causes the contents of the stored fanfare command and the contents of the stored variation pattern (whether the time mission entry effect has been executed or suddenly changed). Based on whether or not the rush effect has been executed, either a fanfare effect or a two-round effect (a two-round effect corresponding to a time mission rush effect, a two-round effect corresponding to a sudden change rush effect) is selected ( Step S852). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects process data corresponding to the selected fanfare effect or two-round effect (step S853). Then, the process timer is started (step S854), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S855).

  If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in step S850 is not a big hit symbol (non-probability variation symbol, probability variation symbol, or sudden probability variation symbol), that is, if it is an outlier symbol (N in step S850), the effect control microcomputer 100 resets a predetermined flag (step S856). For example, when a flag corresponding to the decorative symbol stop designation command is set, such a flag is reset. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S857).

  FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the big hit display process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open command has been received is set (step S901). The special winning opening open flag is set in the command analysis process (see step S645). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in step S901), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S902), and the production device (in accordance with the contents of the process data n) Control of the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S903). For example, in the case of 15 rounds of big hit, the variable display device 9 displays a big hit display symbol and executes an effect of displaying characters or characters indicating that a big hit has occurred. Further, for example, in the effect for two rounds, an effect for displaying special characters or characters is executed.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S905). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S906).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S901), the production control microcomputer 100 produces an in-round production (the number of rounds) based on the contents of the 15 round big prize opening open command. An effect for executing the corresponding round display is selected (step S907). When a command for opening a special prize opening for 2 rounds is received, there is no need to newly select an effect since an effect for 2 rounds is continuously executed during the round, but 2 for each round. When switching the effect included in the performance for round (for example, when switching the display screen of the effect for two rounds), the effect included in the effect for two rounds may be newly selected for each round. . Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (step S908), and process data corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S909). Then, the process timer is started (step S910), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805) (step S911).

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing in-round processing (step S805) in the effect control process. In the in-round processing, first, the production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not a flag after opening the special prize opening indicating that a command after opening the special prize opening has been received is set (step S921). Note that the flag after the special winning opening is opened is set by command analysis processing (see step S645). When the flag for opening the big prize opening is not set (N in step S921), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S922), and the production device (in accordance with the contents of the process data n) Control of the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S923). For example, the variable display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and executes an effect of displaying characters indicating the number of rounds, other characters, and the like. Moreover, in the effect for two rounds, the effect which displays a special character, a character, etc. is performed. When the re-lottery effect is to be executed during the big hit game (when the big lottery re-draw lottery execution flag is set), a predetermined round (for example, 7 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.) A re-lottery effect is executed.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S924), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S925). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S926).

  When the flag after opening the big prize opening is set in step S921 (Y in step S921), the production control microcomputer 100 performs interval production (according to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the command after opening the big prize opening. An effect for performing interval display is selected (step S927). When a command is received after opening the grand prize opening for 2 rounds, there is no need to select a new production since there is no need to select a new production since 2 rounds of production have been executed. When switching the effect included in the effect for the second time (for example, when switching the display screen of the effect for two rounds), the effect included in the effect for the second round may be newly selected after the round. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the flag after the special winning opening is opened (step S928), and selects process data corresponding to the selected interval effect (step S929). Then, the process timer is started (step S930), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the round post-processing (step S806) (step S931).

  106 and 107 are flowcharts showing the round post-processing (step S806) in the effect control process. In the round post-processing, the effect control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not the ending flag is set (step S940). When the ending flag is not set (N in step S940), the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open command is received is set. Confirmation is made (step S941). When the special winning opening open flag is not set (N in step S941), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S942), and the production device (in accordance with the contents of the process data n) Control of the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S943).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S944), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S945). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S946).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S941), the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether it is necessary to execute the re-lottery production during the big hit (during the round) ( Step S947). Specifically, when the big hit re-lottery execution flag or the big hit mid-relottering effect execution flag is set (when the re-lottery effect is executed in a predetermined round), the re-lottery effect during the big hit Is determined to be necessary.

  When it is determined that it is necessary to execute the re-lottery effect during the big hit (Y in step S947), the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the effect during the round in which the re-lottery effect is executed (step S948). Then, a re-lottery execution completion flag is set (step S949). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not necessary to execute the re-lottery effect during the big hit (N in Step S947), the mid-round effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is selected (Step S950).

  Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (step S951), and process data corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S952). Then, the process timer is started (step S953), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805) (step S954).

  When the ending reception flag is set in step S940 (Y in step S940), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a re-lottery effect needs to be executed during the ending effect (step S955). Specifically, when the ending re-lottery execution flag or the ending re-lottery execution execution flag is set, and even if the big hit mid-relot lottery execution flag or the big hit mid-relottery execution execution flag is set, If the re-lottery executed flag indicating that the lottery effect has been executed during the big hit (during the round) is not set (see step S949), it is determined that the re-lottery effect needs to be executed during the ending effect.

  When it is determined that the re-lottery effect needs to be executed during the ending effect (Y in step S955), the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the ending effect for executing the re-lottery effect (step S956). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not necessary to execute the re-lottery effect during the ending effect (N in step S955), an ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is selected (step S957).

  Here, the execution time of the ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is made shorter than the execution time of the ending effect that executes the re-lottery effect. For example, the execution time of the ending effect that executes the re-lottery effect is 10 seconds, and the execution time of the ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is 3 seconds. By setting in this way, it is possible to avoid that the effect is unnecessarily executed for a long time when there is no need to notify the transition to the probability changing state.

  When selecting an ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect in step S957, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit with a flag (probable big hit decision flag, normal big hit decision flag). Choose different ending effects depending on whether you are a big hit or a normal big hit. For example, in the case of a probable big hit, an effect that informs the player that the game will change to a probable state after the big hit is over (instead of notifying that the player is promoted from a non-probable variable symbol to a probable symbol like the re-lottery effect, Select an ending effect that executes an effect that informs the transition to a probabilistic state based on the normal), and in the case of a big hit, select an ending effect that executes an effect that informs the player that it will shift to the short state after the big hit To do.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 resets the ending reception flag (step S958), and selects process data corresponding to the ending effect (step S959). Then, the process timer is started (step S960), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect process (step S807) (step S961).

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the big hit end effect process (step S807) in the effect control process. In the big hit end effect process, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S971), and controls the effect device (variable display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n. Execute (Step S972). For example, when the end of the big hit is displayed, or when a re-lottery effect is included in the ending effect, the re-lottery effect is executed.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S973), and if the process timer has timed out, predetermined flags (probability big hit decision flag, normal big hit decision flag, Suddenly probable big hit decision flag, big hit re-lottery execution flag, ending re-lottery execution flag, etc.) are reset (step S974), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800). Setting is made (step S975).

  FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the small hit effect process (step S808) in the effect control process. In the small hit effect process, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S981), and controls the effect device (variable display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n. Execute (step S982). Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the 2R effect time timer (step S983).

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the 2R production time timer has timed out (step S984). If not timed out, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S985). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S986). . Then, the process timer is started (step S987).

  If the 2R effect time timer has timed out (Y in step S984), the effect control microcomputer 100 resets a predetermined flag (such as a small hit flag) (step S988), and sets the value of the effect control process flag. A value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) is set (step S989).

  Next, a description will be given of the effect mode during the variation of the decorative pattern. FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode during normal fluctuation and normal reach fluctuation in a fluctuation pattern with super reach. When the variation of the decorative symbol is started, the variation speed is increased from the state where the left middle right decorative symbol is stopped, and the variation is performed for a predetermined time in a state where the variation rate becomes high. Then, the fluctuation rate becomes lower than the symbol “8” which is two frames before the symbol “7” which is the left symbol, the symbol “7” stops at the middle stage, and the fluctuation variation starts. Next, the right symbol is the symbol “6” which is two frames before the stop symbol “7”, and the fluctuation speed becomes low, the stop symbol “7” stops at the middle stage, and the fluctuation variation starts. At this time, when the left and right symbols are in the middle stage and stop at the same symbol “7”, reach is established in the middle line, and the fluctuation of the normal reach is started. When normal reach fluctuation starts, the sound effect (fluctuating sound) and the lighting mode of the lamp / LED are changed.

  Then, the fluctuation rate is changed from the symbol (“*” next to “1”) of the middle symbol is a predetermined frame before the temporary stop symbol (“*” next to “7”) (for example, 12 frames before the temporary stop symbol). Slow. Note that the background color of the background image (for example, the “sky” color of the background) is blue (daytime) during normal fluctuation and normal reach fluctuation. Then, the middle symbol “7” passes the position of the middle stage effective line one frame, and the temporary stop symbol (“*” next to “7”) temporarily stops on the middle stage effective line. In the case of the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation normal reach (“12 frames”) (the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 4), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined here, and the variation ends. In the case of developing to super reach, after the fluctuation of shaking is performed, the middle symbol is changed again to develop to super reach. At this time, the background color of the background image (the background color of the entire screen) changes to black. In addition, the sound effect (fluctuating sound) and the lighting mode of the lamp / LED are changed. In the present embodiment, reach 1-1 (super reach A), reach 1-2 (super reach A that executes a relief effect), reach 2-1 (super reach B), or reach 2- based on the variation pattern. A case will be described in which the situation is developed to any one of 2 (super reach B for executing a relief effect).

  FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect aspect during a change in super reach A (reach 1-1) in a change pattern with super reach. When the middle symbol is changed again and develops to super reach A (reach 1-1), the effect of tilting operation in super reach A is started. When the tilt operation is performed, the background color of the background image changes from black to red. In the production of the tilt movement, a girl character appears and hits the middle symbol “5” to break it. The girl character hits the next medium symbol “6” to break it. Then, the middle symbol is determined as “7”. Thereby, the big hit symbol of “777” is derived and displayed, and the big hit is determined.

  FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect aspect during the change of super reach A (reach 1-2) in the change pattern with super reach. When the middle symbol is changed again to develop the super reach A (reach 1-2) for executing the relief effect, the tilt operation effect in the super reach A is started. When the tilt operation is performed, the background color of the background image changes from black to red. In the production of the tilt movement, a girl character appears, hits the middle symbol “5” and breaks, and hits the next middle symbol “6”, as in FIG. However, in the case shown in FIG. 112, the middle symbol “6” is not broken and the girl character gives up. At this time, the reach of “767” is temporarily stopped. Note that, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier super reach A, the decorative symbol stop symbol is determined here, and the variation is finished. When the relief effect is executed, an ojisan character appears together with the sound effect “Still More” from the speaker 27, and the relief effect is executed. When the relief effect is executed, the background color of the background image changes from red to rainbow. In addition, the sound effect (fluctuating sound) and the lighting mode of the lamp / LED are changed. In the relief effect, the old character kicks and destroys the middle symbol “6”. Then, the middle symbol is determined as “7”. Thereby, the big hit symbol of “777” is derived and displayed, and the big hit is determined.

  FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect aspect during the change of the super reach B (reach 2-1) in the change pattern with super reach. When the middle symbol is changed again and develops into Super Reach B (Reach 2-1), the effect of tilting operation in Super Reach B is started. When the tilt operation is performed, the background color of the background image changes from black to red. In the direction of the tilt movement, a cannon comes out, and the cannon fires a ball on the middle symbol “5” and breaks it. The cannon also fires and breaks the ball on the next medium symbol “6”. Then, the middle symbol is determined as “7”. Thereby, the big hit symbol of “777” is derived and displayed, and the big hit is determined.

  FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect aspect during the change of super reach B (reach 2-2) in the change pattern with super reach. When the middle symbol re-varies and develops to super reach B (reach 2-2) that executes the relief effect, the effect of the tilt operation in the super reach B is started. When the tilt operation is performed, the background color of the background image changes from black to red. In the tilting action, as in FIG. 113, a cannon comes out, the cannon fires a ball on the middle symbol “5” and breaks it, and also fires a ball on the next middle symbol “6”. However, in the case shown in FIG. 114, the middle symbol “6” remains intact. At this time, the reach of “767” is temporarily stopped. Note that, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier super reach B, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined here, and the fluctuation is finished. When the relief effect is executed, three cannons come out together with the sound effect “still more” from the speaker 27 and the relief effect is executed. When the relief effect is executed, the background color of the background image changes from red to rainbow. In addition, the sound effect (fluctuating sound) and the lighting mode of the lamp / LED are changed. In the relief effect, each of the three cannons fires a ball on the middle symbol “6” and destroys the middle symbol “6”. Then, the middle symbol is determined as “7”. Thereby, the big hit symbol of “777” is derived and displayed, and the big hit is determined.

  Next, the effect aspect of the lottery symbol re-drawing effect executed in the variable display device 9 will be described. FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of a re-lottery effect of jackpot symbol executed in the variable display device. A display effect as illustrated in FIG. 115 is executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 based on an effect control command sent from the game control microcomputer 560. In addition, the display example in FIG. 115 shows a case where the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending effect.

  In this embodiment, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives a variation pattern command other than the variation pattern command for both the normal big hit / probability big hit and the variation pattern command for sudden sudden variation big hit / small hit (in step S619). N, N of S620) Based on the received variation pattern command, the detachment, jackpot, and jackpot type are determined, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined in accordance with that (step S621, FIG. 43). On the other hand, when a variation pattern command for both normal big hit / probable big hit or sudden variation big / small hit is received (Y in step S619, Y in S620), it is based on the symbol information designation command received thereafter. Thus, it is determined whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit, and a stop symbol of the decorative design corresponding to that is determined (step S626, FIG. 66).

  However, even if the production control microcomputer 100 receives the fluctuation pattern command for both normal big hit / probable big hit / sudden change suddenly, the pattern information designation command may be missed. is there. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 cannot determine whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit, or cannot suddenly judge whether it is a probable big hit or a small hit, and determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. It will be impossible. Therefore, when a variation pattern command for both normal big hit / probability variation big hit or sudden variation variation command command for sudden probability variation big hit / small hit is received, a symbol information designation command is missed (Y in step S629, S630). N of S631, N of S631), the stop symbol (temporarily determined symbol) of the decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped is temporarily determined (step S632, FIG. 92). The provisionally determined symbol is a non-probable variable symbol when a normal big hit / probable variation big hit combined variation pattern command is received, and a sudden hit symbol is a small hit when a sudden variation variable / big hit combined variation pattern command is received. It is a design.

  In this way, when the variation pattern command for normal big hit / probable big hit is received, the non-probable symbol is determined after the non-probable symbol is derived and displayed at the end of the variation of the decorative symbol. If it is determined that is a probable big hit, then it is sufficient to promote the non-probable symbol to a probable symbol in the subsequent redraw lottery effect. If it is determined that it is, the probability variation symbol must be demoted to a non-probability variation symbol, and such an effect may discourage the player and reduce the interest of the game. In this embodiment, even if a small hit symbol is provisionally determined as a provisionally determined symbol, the re-lottery effect is not executed.

  In the example of FIG. 115, when the symbol information designation command is missed even though the variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probability variation jackpot is received, the non-probability variation symbol “444” is temporarily determined as the stop symbol of the decoration symbol. At the end of the decorative symbol variation, the non-probable variation symbol “444” is derived and displayed (temporary stop display). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the re-lottery effect should be executed based on the content of the fanfare command (steps S635 and S636), and when it is determined that the re-lottery effect should be executed. The probability variation symbol derived and displayed in the re-lottery effect is determined (step S637), and the timing for executing the re-lottery effect is determined (steps S638 to S642). In the example of FIG. 115, it is assumed that the re-lottery effect is determined to be executed during the ending effect.

  As shown in FIG. 115, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the big hit game based on the reception of the fanfare command, and performs the production of each round (production during the round) based on the reception of the command for opening the big prize opening. Execution is performed in order, and effects between the rounds (interval effects) are sequentially performed on the basis of the reception of the command after the special winning opening is opened. And the ending effect which alert | reports completion | finish of jackpot based on reception of an ending command is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 115, the re-lottery effect is executed in the ending effect. Specifically, re-variation is started in a state in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are aligned with the same symbol, and then an effect that the probability variation symbol (“777” in the example of FIG. 115) is derived and displayed is executed. . Then, the player is informed that the state has entered (changed) into the probability variation state.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when determining the middle symbol in the reach-less losing determination process, the middle symbol selection table that does not become a chance symbol according to the left and right symbols is determined using the chance forbidden rule table. Since the middle symbol is determined using the selected middle symbol selection table, when it is determined that the combination of the left, middle and right symbols does not appear as a chance, the chance symbol is displayed as the missed symbol. Can be reliably prevented from being displayed.

  In addition, when determining the middle symbol, select the middle symbol selection table that does not become a symbol similar to the chance according to the left and right symbols (acceptable similarity symbol, small hit similar symbol) using the chance prohibition table, Since the middle symbol is determined using the selected middle symbol selection table, it is possible to reliably prevent the symbol similar to the chance symbol from being derived and displayed as a missed symbol. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the chance eyes are derived and displayed.

  In addition, in the process of determining whether there is a loss with reach, the shift after super reach (single reach or double reach) is greater than the symbol selection table during normal shift, which is used when determining the shift pattern after normal reach (single / double reach). In the super development time symbol selection table used for determining symbols, the determination values are distributed so that the symbol difference with respect to the left and right symbols is reduced at a higher rate. That is, in the symbol selection table during normal deviation shown in FIG. 57, the number of determination values allocated to the symbol difference “−1” and “+1” is 4 or 5, but the symbol during super development shown in FIG. In the selection table, the number of determination values assigned to the symbol differences “−1” and “+1” is 7 or 8. Therefore, depending on the fluctuation pattern such as normal reach or super reach, for example, it is possible to vary the ratio of the reach out-of-reach symbol (for example, a one-frame misaligned symbol) that is close to the big hit symbol.

  In addition, in the symbol selection table during normal deviation, which is used when determining a symbol after a normal reach (single / double common reach), the judgment value is changed depending on whether a single reach is established or a double reach is established. The difference between the reach symbols is determined by using the tables having different fractions, and the middle symbol is determined. Therefore, depending on the number of effective lines to reach, the reach-disappearing symbol close to the big hit symbol (for example, one frame deviation) The ratio of the irresponsible loss pattern) can be varied. In addition, since the determination value is not assigned to the symbol difference “−2” with respect to the reach symbol in the double reach table, it is possible to prevent the big hit symbol from being reliably derived and displayed.

  In addition, the normal middle symbol temporary stop selection table used when determining the temporary stop symbol before the execution of the relief effect is more preferable than the normal symbol intermediate symbol selection table used when determining the lost symbol after the normal reach. The determination values are distributed so that the symbol difference with respect to the left and right symbols decreases at a high rate. That is, in the symbol selection table during normal deviation shown in FIG. 57, the number of determination values assigned to the symbol differences “−1” and “+1” is 4 or 5, but the normal middle symbol for normal shown in FIG. In the stop selection table, the number of determination values assigned to the symbol differences “−1” and “+1” is 7 or 8. Therefore, for example, if the symbol is a devastating one frame shift, the rate at which the relief effect is executed is high. Accordingly, it is possible to make the player have an interest in the symbols that are out of normal reach.

  Also, if the production control microcomputer 100 has missed the symbol information designation command even though it has received the variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probability variation jackpots (Y in step S629, N in step S630, S631). N), a non-probability variable symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed (step S632, FIG. 92), and the determined decorative symbol is derived and displayed (step S842). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not a big hit game is generated even if the production control microcomputer 100 misses the design information designation command, and the production control command related to the design of the decorative design. As a result, the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits an ending command indicating whether or not to shift to the probable change state after completion of the big hit game and whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect (steps S451 to S452), and the effect control microcomputer. When the computer 100 specifies execution of the re-lottery effect based on the content of the ending command from the game control microcomputer 560 (Y in step S955), the re-lottery effect is executed after the end of the big hit game (step S956). , S972). According to such a configuration, since the lottery effect may be executed until the next symbol variable display starts even after the end of the big hit game, the expectation for the transition to the probability change state is further increased. Can last for a period of time.

  In addition, when the effect control microcomputer 100 specifies that the promotion effect is not executed based on the content of the ending command (N in step S955), the ending effect that does not execute the promotion effect is executed after the big hit game is finished. (Steps S957 and S972). According to such a configuration, it can be seen that the promotion effect is not performed even after the end of the big hit game, and the player can easily grasp the game state after the end of the big hit game.

  In the above embodiment, when the re-lottery effect is executed after the big hit game is started, the non-probable variable symbol is always promoted to the probable variable symbol. However, the non-probable variable symbol is not promoted to the probable variable symbol. A re-lottery effect may be executed. In this case, the same effect (revariation of non-probabilistic variation symbol) as the case of promotion to probability variation symbol is executed until the middle of the re-lottery production, and then the probability variation big hit instead of the notification of probability variation big hit (stop display of probability variation symbol) A notification to the effect that it will not become (stop display of a non-probable variation symbol) will be performed. In addition, the execution time of the re-lottery effect that is not promoted to the probability variable symbol is set to be the same as the execution time (for example, 10 seconds) of the re-lottery effect that is promoted to the probability variable symbol.

  In addition, when transitioning to the probable state, the execution time of the ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect is set to be shorter than the execution time of the ending effect that executes the re-lottery effect. When there is no need to notify the user, it can be avoided that the presentation is unnecessarily executed for a long time.

  Also, on condition that the game control microcomputer 560 is determined to be a big hit, a fanfare command indicating whether or not to shift to the promiscuous state and a big hit is transmitted (steps S366 and S367) for effect control. When the microcomputer 100 cannot receive the symbol information designation command (Y in step S635), a fanfare command (fanfare 2 indicating that the non-probable variation symbol is provisionally determined and that it is determined to shift to the probability variation state). (4 designation command) is received (Y in step S636), the promotion effect for informing that the state is to be shifted to the certain change state at a predetermined timing is executed (step S947 based on the re-lottery execution flag set in step S642). Or it is determined in step S955 that it is necessary to execute the re-lottery effect. , Which is configured to perform the steps S948, S923 or steps S956, S972), it is possible to take the matching of the display results to be displayed on the gaming machine interior control state and variable display device 9.

  In addition, when the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the promotion effect from the start to the end of the jackpot game, the promotion effect is performed from the end of the jackpot game until the start of the variable display of the symbol. It is prohibited to execute (when the re-lottery effect is performed during the big hit round, it is determined that it is not necessary to execute the re-lottery effect in the ending in step S955 by setting the re-lottery execution completed flag in step S949. Therefore, it is possible to prevent useless control of executing the promotion effect again after executing the promotion effect.

  Further, when the production control microcomputer 100 specifies that the super-reach is developed based on the variation pattern command, after the reach design is derived and displayed, the medium design constituting the jackpot design in combination with the reach design is predetermined. Because the reach production that develops to super reach after passing the active line (composition position of the big hit symbol) is executed, the expectation of the big hit can be given when the middle symbol constituting the big hit symbol passes the effective line At the same time, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for developing into a super reach after the off symbol is stopped and displayed, and to improve the fun of the game.

  Further, when the normal reach is developed to the super reach, the middle symbols are temporarily stopped after the normal reach is changed for a predetermined period, and thereafter, the middle symbols are changed again to develop the super reach. In such a configuration, there are a case where the stop symbol after the end of fluctuation of normal reach re-varies and develops to super reach, and a case where the stop symbol after the end of fluctuation of normal reach is determined without re-variation as it is. The player can be interested in whether or not to change again when the symbol is stopped at the end of the change of the game, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, in the case of developing from the super reach to the relief effect, the middle symbol is temporarily stopped after the change of the super reach is performed for a predetermined period, and then the relief effect is executed to develop the jackpot. In such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the relief effect is executed when the symbol is stopped at the end of the super reach change, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game. .

  In the above embodiment, in the case of the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the position (design difference with respect to the reach design) to be temporarily stopped when developing into super reach based on the random number. However, the game control microcomputer 560 may determine the position where the game control microcomputer 560 temporarily stops and specify the position using a variation pattern. Also, in the case of a fluctuation pattern at the time of loss, it may be configured to determine the position to be temporarily stopped (the symbol difference with respect to the reach symbol) based on a random number when developing into super reach. The configuration may be such that the control microcomputer 100 determines the position to be temporarily stopped, or the game control microcomputer 560 determines the position to be temporarily stopped and is designated by a variation pattern command.

  In the present invention, after the reach identification information is derived and displayed, the final stop identification information constituting the specific display result in combination with the reach identification information is developed into a special reach after passing the configuration position of the specific display result. When, for example, “7” is derived and displayed as the reach symbol (first stop symbol, second stop symbol), the final stop symbol “7” temporarily stops after passing the stop position on the reach line of the reach symbol. After that, when it changes again and develops to super reach, the final stop pattern “7” temporarily stops before the stop position on the reach line of the reach pattern, and then changes again on the reach line of the reach pattern. When developing to Super Reach after passing the stop position, Super Reach without temporary stop after the final stop symbol “7” passes the stop position on the effective line of the reach design. It includes the case of development.

  For “passing”, the stop position on the effective line of the reach symbol when the decorative symbol moves vertically or horizontally on the display screen of the variable display device 9 (in the case of vertical scroll or horizontal scroll) is set as the reach position. When the position of the last stop symbol that is the same as the symbol moves across, or when the decorative symbol is switched at the same position on the display screen of the variable display device 9 (the symbol is rotated and switched, or the symbols are replaced one after another) The last stop symbol is switched to the same symbol as the reach symbol and then switched to another symbol.

  In the above embodiment, in the reach determination loss determination process, the middle symbol is determined by the difference with respect to the reach symbol in both cases of single reach and double reach. Alternatively, the middle symbol may be determined by the difference with respect to the left symbol or the right symbol in the middle and lower tiers.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the symbol information designation command is missed after suddenly receiving the variation pattern command for both the probability variation big hit / small hit, the small hit symbol is tentatively determined and displayed. (See step S684 in FIG. 92). However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, a suddenly probable pattern may be tentatively determined and displayed. Further, the small hit symbol and the sudden probability variation symbol may be a common symbol. Also, when the time mission rush effect is executed (when the change pattern command of the change number 89 is received), the symbol “135”, when the sudden probability change / small hit common rush effect is executed (the change pattern of the change number 90) When the command is received), the symbol “357” is displayed, and when the sudden change entry effect is suddenly executed (when the variation pattern command of the variation number 91 is received), the symbol “531” is preliminarily matched to the effect. You may make it display.

  In the above embodiment, the execution timing of the re-lottery effect is set to be during the jackpot game (during the round) or during the ending effect after the jackpot game ends, but after the jackpot game is started, Any timing may be used as long as it is between the end and the start of a new change. For example, the fanfare effect may be in progress or the interval display may be in progress. And it may be comprised so that the execution timing of such a lottery effect may be designated with a symbol information designation command. In this case, the execution time of the fanfare effect, the display time of the interval display, and the like may be varied depending on the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect. Further, the number of re-drawing effects after the start of the big hit game may be once or three times or more.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the case where the symbol information designation command is missed, the non-probable variation symbol is determined and displayed, and whether or not the re-lottery effect is performed according to the content of the fanfare command received thereafter, and Although the execution timing has been confirmed (steps S636, S637, and S638), when the ending command is received, it may be configured to confirm whether or not the re-lottery effect is performed according to the content of the ending command. . Even with such a configuration, the control state inside the gaming machine and the display result displayed on the variable display device 9 can be matched. In this case, the processing of steps S635 to 637 in FIG. 42 may be executed when an ending command is received. In addition, when it is necessary to execute the re-lottery effect when the ending command is received, the re-lottery effect must be executed during the ending effect, so the process of determining the execution timing of the re-lottery effect (steps S638 to S638). S642) is not necessary.

  In the above embodiment, the symbol information designation command is used to designate whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect after the big hit game and the execution timing. However, the symbol information designation command is used to execute the re-lottery effect. You may comprise so that presence / absence etc. may not be designated. With such a configuration, the types of symbol information designation commands can be reduced, and the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced. In the case of such a configuration, the production control microcomputer 100 uniquely determines whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect after the big hit game and the execution timing. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect using a predetermined random number, and executes the re-lottery effect at a predetermined timing based on the determination result.

  In addition, with the symbol information designation command, the presence / absence and execution timing of the re-lottery effect after the big hit game are designated, and the production control microcomputer 100 independently determines whether or not the re-lottery effect after the big hit game is executed and the execution timing. It may be configured to determine. In such a configuration, it is specified that the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending by the symbol information specifying command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 decides uniquely that the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, and conversely The symbol information designation command specifies that the re-lottery effect is to be executed during the big hit, and the effect control microcomputer 100 may uniquely determine that the re-lottery effect is to be executed during the ending. In this case, if the re-lottery effect is executed during the ending and the re-lottery effect is executed even in the ending even though the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit and promoted to the probability variation pattern, the execution timing of the re-lottery effect cannot be matched. Therefore, when the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, processing for prohibiting the execution of the re-lottery effect during the ending is executed. Specifically, when the re-lottery effect is executed during the big hit, a flag indicating that is set, and based on the fact that the flag is set, it is decided to execute the re-lottery effect during the ending. Even if it is, it controls so that a re-lottery effect is not performed.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 designates only the promotion timing (fluctuating, big hit, or ending) with the variation pattern command or the symbol information designation command, and the production control microcomputer 100 always re-starts at the timing designated by the command. The execution control microcomputer 100 redraws the lottery effect (with promotion) with respect to the execution timing of other re-lottery effects before promotion and the execution timing of the re-lottery effect when not promoted (usually in the case of big hit). It may be determined by lottery whether or not to produce (no promotion).

Embodiment 2. FIG.
As described above, in the normal production mode, the production of five effective lines (upper horizontal line, middle horizontal line, lower horizontal line, right-down line, and right-up line) is performed. On the other hand, chance mode to enter after sudden probability big hits and small hits occur (mode to enter after time mission effect, sudden probability change / small hit common rush effect, sudden probability change rush effect is executed, and two rounds effect is executed ), The effect is performed with one effective line (the middle horizontal line). That is, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are switched to an effect that varies by one line in the middle. Hereinafter, one line of production will be described.

  Note that the game control microcomputer 560 does not change during the chance mode (from the sudden chance of big hit / small hit until the chance mode end timing (for example, until the chance of winning 15 rounds of big hit, until the chance mode is won). )) Is transmitted as a chance designation background designation command (9503H) as a background designation command. When the chance control background designation command 100 is received, the production control microcomputer 100 is in the chance mode in the fluctuation. A decorative design is determined using a table.

  However, the production control microcomputer 100 does not select the table in the chance mode based on the chance state background designation command, but suddenly receives the variation pattern command or symbol information designation command for designating probability change / small hit. This is a configuration in which a decorative design is determined using a table in the chance mode until a command specifying a big hit of 15 rounds is received or until a predetermined number of fluctuations are completed after the condition for transition to the chance mode is satisfied. May be. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 may transmit a background designation command suitable for the gaming state without using the chance state background designation command.

  116 to FIG. 119 show the chance eyes (chance eyes A and B, chance chances for surprise, chance chances for small hits) in the chance mode. These chances are chances that are established in the middle horizontal line in the chances shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 117, during chance mode, chance item B does not appear in the production. Therefore, when the variation pattern command designating the display of chance item B is selected by game control microcomputer 560, the production is performed. The control microcomputer 100 executes control for displaying the chance item A in the production based on the reception of the variation pattern command for designating the display of the chance item B.

  Even in the chance mode, the same effect control commands as those in the normal effect mode (commands shown in FIGS. 15 and 16; for the background designation command, the chance state background designation command (9503 (H)) is transmitted. Is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100. The selection of the variation pattern is the same as in the normal effect mode. 17 and 18 show a table (chance mode selection table) used to determine the decorative symbols to be stopped in the chance mode. For example, in the case of normal fluctuation (variation number 1), the table (BT-1, 2, 3, 4) is used. The normal selection table and the chance mode selection table associated with the same variation pattern are used when determining the same type of symbols (outlier symbol, non-probable variation symbol, probability variation symbol, etc.). For example, T-1, 2, 3, and 4 of the normal selection table are tables for determining the symbols without reach, but BT-1, 2, 3, and 4 of the chance mode selection table are also used for determining the symbols without reach. It is a table to be determined.

  FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing a left symbol selection table in the chance mode. FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram of a right symbol selection table in the chance mode. 120 and 121, in the case of a one-line effect, a blank “*” symbol is not used. That is, only the symbols “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, and “8” are used. Therefore, no judgment value is assigned to “*”. Note that the probable variation symbols are “1”, “3”, “5”, “6”, “7”, and “8”, and the non-probability variation symbols are “2” and “4”. Using these tables (BT-1 and 2), the left and right symbols when there is no reach are determined in the same manner as the reach-less loss determination process described in the first embodiment.

  When entering the mission, for example, when a mission of “put 7 on the left symbol” is presented, and the mission is not achieved, the left symbol selection for which no judgment value is assigned to “7” The left symbol is determined using the table (BT-1).

  FIG. 122 and FIG. 123 are explanatory diagrams showing a chance eye prohibition pattern during the chance mode. Note that the hatched portion (shaded area) in FIGS. 122 and 123 is a chance-forbidden pattern that is not used. Also in other drawings (tables and the like) in the second embodiment, the hatched portions (shaded) indicate that they are not used for control or processing in the second embodiment. 124 and 125 are explanatory diagrams showing a middle symbol selection table in the chance mode. FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram of a chance table forbidden rules during the chance mode. Using these tables (BT-3, 4), similar to the reach-less losing determination process described in the first embodiment, medium symbols when no reach is determined.

  FIG. 127 is an explanatory diagram showing an arrangement pattern of reach symbols during the chance mode. FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing a common reach symbol selection table in the chance mode. FIG. 129 is an explanatory diagram of a single reach symbol selection table in the chance mode. FIG. 130 is an explanatory diagram of a double reach symbol selection table in the chance mode. FIG. 131 is an explanatory diagram of a symbol selection table during normal mode deviation during the chance mode. FIG. 132 is an explanatory diagram of a symbol selection table during super development during the chance mode. Using these tables (BH-1, 2, 3, 4, 5), the reach symbol (left and right symbols) when the reach is present is determined in the same manner as the reach-losing determination process described in the first embodiment. . Even in a one-line effect, when double reach is designated by the variation pattern command, double reach is established only at that time.

  In the case of entering a mission, for example, when a mission of “get 5 reach” is presented and the mission is not achieved, select a reach symbol for which no judgment value is assigned to reach symbol “5” Reach symbols are determined using the table (BH-1, 2, 3).

  FIG. 133 is an explanatory diagram of a chance eye A selection table in the chance mode. FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram showing a chance eye B selection table in the chance mode. Using these tables (BH-6, 7), the chance eye A and the chance eye B at the time of the loss of reach are determined in the same manner as the reach / losing determination process described in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 135 is an explanatory diagram of a pre-W reach temporary stop symbol selection table during the chance mode. In the one-line effect, before double reach is established, single reach (reach of the horizontal line in the middle stage) is established, temporarily stopped, and then developed into double reach. The table (BH-10) shown in FIG. 135 is used to determine the symbol of the single reach that is temporarily stopped before the establishment of the double reach.

  FIG. 136 is an explanatory diagram showing an arrangement pattern of jackpot symbols during the chance mode. Even in the chance mode, a double hit may result in a big hit, so not only the middle horizontal line but also the right-down and right-up lines are effective lines for the big hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, in the normal production mode, when the five symbols “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, and “8” are aligned on the active line, it is assumed that the probability variation is a big hit. In the mode, when 6 symbols of “1”, “3”, “5”, “6”, “7”, and “8” are aligned on the effective line, the probability variation big hit is assumed. In this case, the ratio of the specific symbols in the decorative symbols (specific symbol ratio) is 6/8 = 75%. Note that the probability (proportion of probability variation jackpots) of probability variation jackpots (excluding sudden probability variation jackpots) with respect to the probability of 15 rounds jackpots is the same as in the normal performance mode. In this way, by increasing the ratio of specific symbols during chance mode compared to during normal performance mode, specific symbols are more consistently derived and displayed during chance mode than during normal performance mode. If the ratio is high, the player can think, and as a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced. It should be noted that the ratio of a specific symbol may be improved as compared with that in the normal gaming state when the probability mode is controlled (including the probability variation time short state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think that a specific symbol is derived and displayed together in a probability variation state and the probability that the probability variation big hit (the proportion that the probability variation state is continued) is high. You will be able to enhance your interest. In other words, in the normal gaming state or in the short-time state, the player is happy if the big hit (non-probable big hit) is a big hit, but in the probable state, the probabilistic state ends when the normal big hit. Therefore, the player wants not only a big hit but also a promising big hit. Therefore, when the player is in the probabilistic state, expecting a probable big hit, increasing the ratio of a specific symbol in the probable state will attract the player's interest and further enhance the interest of the game. it can.

  In the first probability variation design determination process, the probability variation symbol (relief effect is executed) according to the variation pattern using the table (BF-2, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18). In this case, a final stop symbol and a temporary stop symbol) are determined. In addition, using the table (BF-26), a single reach symbol to be temporarily stopped before the establishment of double reach is determined. Further, the chance eyes A and chance eyes B are determined using the table (BF-19, 20).

  Further, in the first non-probable variable symbol determination process, a non-probable variable symbol corresponding to the variation pattern is determined using the table (BF-1, 7, 11, 15). In addition, using the table (BF-26), a single reach symbol to be temporarily stopped before the establishment of double reach is determined.

  In the sudden probability variation design determination process, the sudden probability variation symbol is determined using the table (BF-25).

  Further, in the second non-probable variable symbol determination process, a temporary stop symbol and a final stop symbol corresponding to the variation pattern are determined using the table (BF-1, 6, 7, 11, 15). In addition, using the table (BF-26), a single reach symbol to be temporarily stopped before the establishment of double reach is determined. Further, the chance eyes A and chance eyes B are determined using the table (BF-19, 20).

  In the second probability variation design determination process, the temporary stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined using the table (BF-3, 6, 9, 13, 17). In addition, using the table (BF-26), a single reach symbol to be temporarily stopped before the establishment of double reach is determined. Further, the chance eyes A and chance eyes B are determined using the table (BF-19, 20).

  Further, in the small hit symbol determination process, the small hit symbol is determined using the table (BK-1).

  As described above, a 1-line effect can also be realized by a process substantially similar to the case of the 5-line effect described in the first embodiment.

Embodiment 3 FIG.
FIG. 160 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board, the sound / lamp control board, and the display control board in the third embodiment. In the board configuration shown in FIG. 10, the production control microcomputer 100 mounted on the production control board 80 controls the display state of the variable display device 9, and outputs control signals to the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70. Thus, the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps and the sound output of the speaker 27 are controlled. However, in the board configuration shown in FIG. 160, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A mounted on the sound / lamp control board 80A controls the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps and the sound output of the speaker 27, and the display control board 80B. The display control microcomputer 100 </ b> B is configured to control the display state of the variable display device 9. Then, a control command (hereinafter, sound / lamp control command) from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 is first transmitted to the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A of the sound / lamp control board 80A. The sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A transmits a control command (hereinafter referred to as a display control command) corresponding to the sound / lamp control command received to the display control microcomputer 100B of the display control board 80B. The sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A controls the lighting / extinction of various lamps and the sound output of the speaker 27 based on the sound / lamp control command from the game control microcomputer 560. The display control microcomputer 100B The display state of the variable display device 9 is controlled based on a display control command from the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A.

  FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing main sound / lamp control processing executed by the sound / lamp control microcomputer according to the third embodiment. When the power is turned on, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A starts executing the main process. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval of the effect control processing (step S711). Thereafter, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A shifts to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S712). When a timer interrupt occurs, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A clears the flag (step S713) and executes the following sound / lamp control process.

  In the sound / lamp control process, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A first analyzes the received effect control command (sound / lamp side command analysis process: step S714). Next, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A performs a sound / lamp control process (step S715). In the sound / lamp control process, the process corresponding to the current control state is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and various lamps are turned on / off, the sound output of the speaker 27 is controlled, and the like. Further, a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating various random numbers is executed (step S716). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S712.

  FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the sound / lamp-side command analysis process (step S714) in the sound / lamp control main process. The sound / lamp control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is stored in the command reception buffer. In the sound / lamp side command analysis processing, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S721). If a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the reception command is read from the command reception buffer (step S722).

  If the received sound / lamp control command is a control command for specifying a variation pattern (variation pattern command: 8000 (H) to 806A (H)) (step S723), the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A The command EXT data is stored in the fluctuation pattern data storage area in the RAM (step S724), and the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (step S725). Then, control for transmitting a display control command corresponding to the variation pattern to the display control microcomputer 100B is executed (step S726).

  If the received sound / lamp control command is a control command (design information designation command: 8C00 (H) to 8C06 (H)) designating design information (step S727), the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A Control for transmitting a display control command corresponding to the symbol information to the display control microcomputer 100B is executed (step S728). If the received sound / lamp control command is another control command, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A performs control to transmit a display control command corresponding to the other command to the display control microcomputer 100B. This is executed (step S729).

  When the display control microcomputer 100B receives a display control command from the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100A, the same processing as the processing of the effect control means described in each of the above embodiments based on the received command. Execute. That is, the processing when “display control” is replaced with “display control” in FIGS. 39 to 115 is executed.

  In the first and second embodiments, a presentation control board 80, an audio output board 70, and a lamp driver board 35 are provided as boards on which a circuit for controlling the presentation device is mounted. In the third embodiment, a sound / lamp is provided. Although the control board 80A and the display control board 80B are provided, a circuit for controlling the effect device may be mounted on one board. Furthermore, when the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted on two substrates, the way of dividing the circuit for controlling the effect device mounted on each substrate is arbitrary. For example, a first effect control board (display / lamp control board) on which a variable display device 9 and a circuit for controlling a lamp and the like are mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (such as the speaker 27) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards. In the third embodiment, the sound / lamp control board 80A transmits the display control command corresponding to the sound / lamp control command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the display control board 80B. May be the same data as the sound / lamp control command, or may be changed to a simplified command and transmitted as a display control command. In addition, when two boards, the first effect control board and the second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 560 is transmitted to the second effect control board, A command is transmitted as it is from the second effect control board to the first effect control board, or is transmitted after processing (for example, changing the command form or contents, simplifying, or selecting only necessary commands). You may comprise.

  The big hit symbol and the small hit symbol displayed on the special symbol display 8 may be a common symbol (for example, “7”). In this way, the player does not know whether the big hit or the small hit, the big hit type, or the like by the symbol displayed on the special symbol display 8. Therefore, the expectation for the transition to the probable change state in the re-lottery effect is not impaired. Also, there is no loss of expectation for sudden or big hits.

  In addition, as a special symbol stop symbol displayed on the special symbol display 8, the symbol for 15 rounds (probable big hit, non-probable big hit) may be a common big hit symbol. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether the probability change big hit or the non-probability big hit is based on the symbol displayed on the special symbol display 8. In addition, as a special symbol stop symbol displayed on the special symbol indicator 8, the symbol at the time of two rounds (suddenly probable big hit, small hit) may be a common symbol. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether the probability sudden hit or the big hit is suddenly determined by the symbols displayed on the special symbol display 8.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the variation pattern command is a dedicated variation pattern command (a variation pattern command that is not a regular big hit / probable variation big hit combined variation pattern command), the decoration pattern is decorated based on the dedicated variation pattern command. It was comprised so that the stop symbol of a symbol might be determined. However, it is configured to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the symbol information specifying command in the normal state, and to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol by referring to the contents of the variation pattern command only when the symbol information specifying command is missed. May be.

  In addition, when the variation pattern command is a dedicated variation pattern command, the decorative symbol stop symbol is determined based on the variation pattern command regardless of whether or not the symbol information designation command is missed. If the design information designation command cannot be received when any of the variation pattern command dedicated to probability variation jackpot, the variation pattern command dedicated to normal jackpot, or the variation pattern command dedicated to outliers is received, the variation pattern The decoration symbol may be determined based on the content of the command.

  Alternatively, the decorative symbol stop symbol may always be determined based only on the variation pattern command. In other words, the variation pattern commands are all dedicated variation patterns, and the variation pattern command for both normal big hit / probable big hit may not be provided. Alternatively, the decorative symbol stop symbol may always be determined based only on the symbol information designation command. That is, the variation pattern command may be determined according to the content of the symbol information designation command as to the stop symbol of the decorative symbol only by designating the variation pattern (variation time).

  In each of the above embodiments, the variation pattern command and the symbol information designation command are separated, but a single command may be used. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 may transmit one command indicating the variation pattern and the symbol information (disconnected, normal big hit, or probable big hit) to the effect control microcomputer 100 at the start of symbol variation. Good. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the variation of the symbol based on the common command, specifies the variation pattern (including the variation time), and further determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

  In each of the above embodiments, the presence / absence of a re-lottery effect during symbol variation is specified by the variation pattern command (a variation pattern with a re-lottery effect during symbol variation is distinguished from a variation pattern without a re-lottery effect). At the same time, the symbol information designation command specified the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game and the execution timing of the re-lottery effect (promotion effect). However, the symbol information designation command is not limited to this configuration. Without specifying whether or not a re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game, the presence or absence of the re-lottery effect after the start of the big hit game and the re-lottery effect (promotion effect) with the change pattern command The execution timing may be designated.

  In addition, in the variation pattern command, the disparity, the normal big hit, the probability variation big hit are specified (the variation pattern is distinguished for each outlier, the normal big hit, the probability variation big hit), and the presence / absence of the re-drawing effect during the symbol variation is designated, and the symbol information designation In the command, a stop symbol, a non-probable variation symbol, a probability variation symbol, a sudden probability variation symbol, or a small hit symbol may be designated as a stop symbol at the time of a variable stop. When the probability variation big hit (execution of re-lottery effect during big hit) or probability variation big hit (execution of re-lottery effect during ending) is determined in step S62, the probability variable big hit is determined internally, Since the stop symbol is a non-probable variable symbol, a symbol information specifying command for specifying the non-probable variable symbol is transmitted. In the case of such a command designation method, the production control microcomputer 100 recognizes whether it is a big hit or a big hit type (ordinary big hit or a probable big hit) based on the variation pattern command, and Based on the information designation command, it is recognized whether the stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop should be an off symbol, a non-probable variable symbol, a probabilistic variable symbol, a sudden probability variable symbol, or a small hit symbol symbol. Then, in the case of a big hit (excluding a sudden probability change big hit), the production control microcomputer 100 recognizes the presence / absence of a re-lottery effect after the big hit game starts based on the variation pattern command and the symbol information designation command. For example, if the symbol information designation command recognizes that the stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop is an uncertain variable symbol, and if the variable pattern command recognizes a probable bonus symbol, it must be promoted to a probable bonus symbol with a re-lottery effect after the jackpot game starts. Judge that there is.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the re-draw lottery effect after the big hit game, after the symbols are re-variable, the probability variation symbols are derived and displayed. You may make it alert | report to a player that it was a probable big hit by displaying a character (it transfers to a probable change state). In this case, it is determined in step S625E, S692, S1111 that “probability change” is displayed instead of determining the probability change symbol.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the big hit symbol is a flat eye such as “1 · 1 · 1”, but may be a combination of symbols other than the blue eye. For example, a big hit may be made when the left, middle and right symbols on the active line are aligned with “Large, Win, Ri”. In that case, it becomes reach when a part of the big hit symbol is arranged as the left and right symbols on the effective line.

  In each of the above embodiments, the number of fluctuations after the end of the normal jackpot is counted at the start of the fluctuation, and the hourly flag is reset when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number. It is also possible to count the number of fluctuations after the completion and reset the time reduction flag when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the re-drawing effect during the change is executed, the change pattern command for both normal big hit / probable big hit is always transmitted. That is, all of the normal big hit / probable big hit variation patterns included a redrawing effect during variation. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the re-lottery effect during the fluctuation may be included in the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the probable big hit or the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the normal big hit. In addition, there may be a variation pattern that does not include the re-drawing effect during variation as the variation pattern for both normal big hit / probable variation big hit.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the fluctuation pattern command for designating the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit for 15 rounds is a fluctuation pattern command for both normal big hit / probable big hit, a fluctuation pattern command dedicated for certain big hit, and a fluctuation only for normal big hit. Although a pattern command is provided, it is possible to use only a variation pattern command for both normal jackpot / probable variation jackpot and a variation pattern command dedicated to probability variation jackpot (no variation pattern command dedicated to regular jackpot).

  In each of the embodiments described above, when the chance eyes A (or chance eyes B) are continuously stopped and displayed, there is a high possibility that the chance eyes A will be a big hit according to the number of times the chance eyes A are stopped and displayed. You may make it develop into super reach. It should be noted that continuously displaying the chance eyes A is called pseudo continuous notice or pseudo continuous fluctuation. For example, if chance item A is stopped and displayed once, it will be developed into super reach A (super reach with a relatively low probability of big hit), and chance item A will be stopped and displayed twice in succession (specifically The chance eye A was stopped and displayed from the normal fluctuation, and the chance eye A was stopped and displayed again from the normal fluctuation). In this case, it may be developed to super reach C, and when chance eyes A are stopped and displayed four times in succession, it may be developed to super reach D (super reach with the highest possibility of big hit). Further, in addition to the case where the chance B (or chance A) is stopped and displayed and then developed into super reach (super reach D in the embodiment), it is normally stopped due to normal fluctuations (without reaching reach). There may be provided a case of developing to super reach (for example, super reach D) when the off symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of developing to the super reach after the display of the chance eye A or the chance eye B, normal fluctuation is performed after the chance eye A or the chance eye B is stopped and displayed, and then the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped in order. It may be a case of developing to a super reach, or a case of developing directly to a super reach directly (suddenly) without performing normal fluctuation after the chance item A or the chance item B is stopped and displayed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the chance eyes to be displayed with the variation pattern command, and causes the effect control microcomputer 100 to display the chance eyes. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the presentation control microcomputer 100 receives a specific fluctuation pattern command (for example, a fluctuation pattern command with a super reach D), for example. It may be determined whether or not to display, and when it is determined to display a chance eye, a predetermined chance eye may be selected and displayed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the probability change non-notification effect (common to probability change state / normal game state is common) that does not notify the player whether or not the game state after the end of 15 rounds of jackpot has shifted to the probability change state (or the probability change short state). 15 rounds of productions, or productions common to short-time and short-time conditions; for example, productions that do not know whether or not they are in a certain state without changing the background, etc. You may make it perform after the fluctuation | variation after the end of jackpot is started. When executing such a probabilistic non-notification effect, regardless of the probable big hit or non-probable big hit, the big hit symbol will be a non-probable variable symbol (or the probabilistic symbol and the non-probable variable symbol will be shared), and promoted when performing a re-lottery effect. Avoid directing.

  In each of the above embodiments, even if the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed at the end of symbol variation, the lottery effect (for example, the probability variation symbol is re-variable and then the probability variation symbol is stopped again after starting the big hit game) An effect to be displayed or an effect to display the characters “probability change” may be executed. In this case, prior to the re-lottery effect, the player is informed that the winning symbol will be a promising big hit, so the re-lottery effect is not a promotion effect.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, three symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are used as the stop symbols of the decorative symbols. However, if there are three or more symbols, the number of symbols to be displayed is Any number is acceptable. For example, the display screen of the variable display device 9 is divided into a leftmost display area, a second display area from the left, a third display area from the left, and a rightmost display area. A decorative design may be displayed. In this configuration, the stop symbols of the decorative symbols are the four symbols of the leftmost symbol, the second symbol from the left, the third symbol of the left symbol, and the rightmost symbol. In this case, it may be a big hit when all four symbols are aligned, or may be a big hit if three of the four symbols are aligned. Alternatively, the display screen of the variable display device 9 may be divided into a 3 × 3 matrix display area (decorative symbol display area or square) and the ornamental symbols may be displayed in the respective display areas. In this configuration, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is the symbol in the upper left column, the symbol in the upper middle column, the symbol in the upper right column, the symbol in the middle left column, the symbol in the middle middle row, the symbol in the middle middle row, the symbol in the lower left column Nine symbols, the lower middle row of symbols, and the lower right row of symbols. In this case, to a predetermined effective line (for example, upper line, middle line, lower line, left column line, middle column line, right column line, lower right diagonal line, upper right diagonal line) You may make it a big hit when three specific symbols gather.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine of the above embodiment can be given a predetermined game value to a player mainly when the stop symbol of the special symbol variably displayed on the variable display unit based on the start winning becomes the predetermined symbol. A pachinko machine that can be given a predetermined gaming value to a player when there is a prize in a predetermined area of an electric game that is released based on a start prize, or a start prize The present invention can be applied even to a pachinko gaming machine in which a predetermined right is generated or continued when a winning is given to a predetermined electric combination that is released when a stop symbol of a variably displayed symbol becomes a predetermined symbol combination . Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine that inserts game medals to set a bet number and plays a game, or a game machine that inserts game balls instead of game medals to set a bet number and plays a game.

  The present invention can be applied to a game such as a pachinko game machine, and can be applied to a game of a gaming machine in which the game state can be controlled to a special game state such as a probability change state.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement pattern of a reach design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement pattern of a jackpot symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chance eyes A on production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chance eyes B on production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chance eyes (sudden probability variation pattern) for sudden probability variation big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chance eyes for small hits (small hit symbol). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board | substrate, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution rate of the determination value in a jackpot determination table, and the distribution rate of the determination value in a jackpot classification determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big prize opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process after a special winning opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process after a special winning opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit release pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during small hit release. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration symbol command control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command set process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command transmission process. It is a timing diagram showing the transmission timing of the effect control command when the 15-round jackpot game is executed. It is a timing diagram showing the transmission timing of the effect control command when a two-round big hit game and a small hit game are executed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st decoration design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of reach non-losing determination processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for left symbol selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for right symbol selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows a chance eye prohibition pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a chance eye prohibition pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for middle symbol selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for middle symbol selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for middle symbol selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for chance prohibitions. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a reach determination loss determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for common reach symbol selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reach design table for singles. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reach design selection table for doubles. It is explanatory drawing which shows a symbol selection table during normal deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a super development time symbol selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for chance eyes A selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for chance eyes B selection. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st probability variation design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st probability variation design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st non-probable variable symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sudden probability variation design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol selection table for accuracies. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd decoration design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd non-probability variable symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd non-probability variable symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd probability variation design determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the common jackpot symbol selection table (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot (promotion during jackpot promotion), probability variation jackpot (ending promotion)). It is explanatory drawing which shows the common jackpot symbol selection table (probability straight hit). It is explanatory drawing which shows the common jackpot symbol selection table (re-lottery promotion). It is explanatory drawing which shows the common jackpot symbol selection table (relief). It is explanatory drawing which shows the normal symbol temporary stop selection table (relief) for normal. It is explanatory drawing which shows a super development time symbol selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot symbol selection table for singles (a normal jackpot, a probability variation jackpot (promotion during jackpot promotion), a probability variation jackpot (ending promotion)). It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit symbol selection table for singles (probability straight hit). It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot symbol selection table for singles (re-lottery promotion). It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for single jackpot symbol selection (relief). It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for big hit symbol selection for a double tip (normal hit, probable big hit (promotion during big hit), probable big hit (ending promotion)). It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for big hits symbol selection for double tip hits (probability straight hit). It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for big hit symbol selection for double hits (re-lottery promotion). It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for big hits symbol selection for double point hits (relief). It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for big hit symbol selection for double after hits (normal hit, probable big hit (promotion during big hit), probable big hit (ending promotion)). It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit symbol selection table (probability straight hit) for double after hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for double hits jackpot symbol selection (re-lottery promotion). It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for big hit symbol selection for double after (relief). It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for chance eyes A selection. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for chance eyes B selection. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol selection table for small hits. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a temporary determination symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 3rd probability variation design determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a timing chart which shows the development timing of reach and relief production. It is a timing chart which shows the change timing in the change pattern with a normal reach. It is a timing chart which shows the variation timing in the variation pattern with super reach (super A or super B). It is a timing chart which shows the change timing in the change pattern with a super reach including a relief effect (super reach A including a relief effect or super reach B including a relief effect). It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a post-round process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a post-round process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect during the fluctuation | variation of the normal fluctuation | variation in a fluctuation pattern with a super reach, and a normal reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect in the fluctuation | variation of the super reach A (reach 1-1) in the fluctuation pattern with a super reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect in the fluctuation | variation of the super reach A (reach 1-2) in the fluctuation pattern with a super reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect in the fluctuation | variation of the super reach B (reach 2-1) in the fluctuation pattern with a super reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect in the fluctuation | variation of the super reach B (reach 2-2) in the fluctuation pattern with a super reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the re-lottery effect of the jackpot symbol performed in a variable display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chance eyes A on the production | presentation in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chance eyes B on the production in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chance eyes (sudden probability variation pattern) for sudden probability variation big hit in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chance item for small hits (small hit symbol) in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for left symbol selection in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for right symbol selection in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chance prohibition pattern in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the chance prohibition pattern in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for medium symbol selection in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for medium symbol selection in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for chance prohibition rules in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement pattern of the reach symbol in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for common reach symbol selection in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reach design table for singles in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reach design table for doubles in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol selection table at the time of normal deviation in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol selection table during the super development in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for chance eyes A selection in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for chance eyes B selection in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pre-W reach temporary stop symbol selection table in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement pattern of the jackpot symbol in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the common jackpot symbol selection table (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot (promotion during jackpot promotion), probability variation jackpot (ending promotion)) during the chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the common big hit symbol selection table (probability straight hit) in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the common jackpot symbol selection table (re-lottery promotion) in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the common jackpot symbol selection table (relief) in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the middle symbol temporary stop selection table (relief) for normal in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol selection table during the super development in chance mode. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a single jackpot symbol selection table (normal jackpot, probability variable jackpot (promotion during jackpot promotion), probability jackpot (ending promotion)) during the chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot symbol selection table for singles (probability straight hit) in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the single jackpot symbol selection table (re-lottery promotion) in the chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot symbol selection table for singles (relief) in chance mode. It is an explanatory view showing a double hit jackpot symbol selection table (normal jackpot, probable big hit (promotion during big hit), probable big hit (ending promotion)) in the chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot symbol selection table (probability straight hit) for double point hits in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for a jackpot symbol selection for double first hits in a chance mode (re-lottery promotion). It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for big hit symbol selection (relief) for double first hits in chance mode. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a double after-hit big hit symbol selection table (normal big hit, probability variable big hit (big hit middle promotion), probability variable big hit (ending promotion)) in the chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit symbol selection table (probability straight hit) for double after hit in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot symbol selection table for double after hits in chance mode (re-lottery promotion). It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for big hit symbol selection (relief) for double after hit in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for chance eyes A selection in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for chance eyes B selection in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pre-W reach temporary stop symbol selection table in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol selection table for suspicion in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol selection table for small hits in chance mode. 10 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of a relay board, a sound / lamp control board, and a display control board in Embodiment 3. FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a main sound / lamp control process executed by the sound / lamp control microcomputer according to the third embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing sound / lamp-side command analysis processing in the third embodiment.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Special symbol display 9 Variable display device 14 Start winning opening 15 Variable winning ball device 31 Main board 80 Production control board 80A Sound / lamp control board 80B Display control board 100 Production control microcomputer 100A Sound / lamp control Microcomputer 100B Microcomputer for display control 560 Microcomputer for game control

Claims (7)

Provided with a variable display device having a plurality of variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified, and for a player when a combination of identification information results in a specific display result as a display result of variable display A gaming machine that shifts to an advantageous specific gaming state and executes a special effect during variable display of identification information in the variable display device when the combination of identification information results in a special display result as a display result of variable display. And
A game control microcomputer for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect control microcomputer for controlling the display state of the variable display device,
The game control microcomputer is:
Predetermining means for determining whether to shift to the specific gaming state and a variable display pattern of variable display of identification information before derivation display of display results;
A pre-determined command transmitting means for transmitting a pre-determined command capable of specifying the determination result of the pre-determining means,
The production control microcomputer is:
Reach identification information random number for determining reach identification information other than final stop identification information derived and displayed last when it becomes reach and does not shift to the specific gaming state, difference between the reach identification information and the final stop identification information Difference determining random number for determining the first identification information constituting the non-specific display result different from the specific display result that is not reach and is not displayed and shifted to the specific gaming state, the second identification Numerical value updating means for updating numerical values of the first identification information random number, the second identification information random number and the third identification information random number for determining the information and the third identification information;
Numerical value extraction means for extracting the numerical values of the reach identification information random number, the difference determination random number, the first identification information random number, the second identification information random number and the third identification information random number from the numerical value updating means at a predetermined time; ,
Identification information determining means for determining a combination of identification information to be derived and displayed as a display result on the plurality of variable display units in the variable display device based on the prior determination command;
Based on the reception of the prior determination command, the variable display device starts variable display of identification information, and is determined by the identification information determination means when a variable display time that can be specified from the variable display pattern has elapsed. Variable display control means for deriving and displaying a combination of identification information obtained,
The variable display control means derives and displays the reach identification information determined by the identification information determination means based on specifying that the reach is a special reach among the reach based on the prior determination command. Later, the final stop identification information that constitutes the specific display result in combination with the reach identification information performs a reach effect that develops to the special reach after passing the configuration position of the specific display result,
The identification information determining means includes
Based on the pre-determined command, determine whether to make the special display result,
When it is determined to be the special display result, a combination of identification information derived and displayed is determined as the special display result,
The reach identification information random number extracted in the reach identification information table in which control data is allocated to the reach identification information when it is determined that the reach is reached and the state is not shifted to the specific gaming state based on the predetermined command. The identification information associated with the control data that matches the numerical value is determined as the reach identification information, and matches the numerical value of the difference determination random number extracted in the difference determination table in which the control data is allocated to the difference. A difference value associated with control data is determined as a difference between the reach identification information and the final stop identification information, and the final stop identification information is determined according to a difference with the reach identification information;
When it is specified that the game is not reached and the game state is not shifted to the specific gaming state based on the predetermined command, the first identification information table in which control data is allocated to the first identification information is extracted. The identification information associated with the control data matching the numerical value of the first identification information random number is determined as the first identification information and extracted in the second identification information table in which the control data is allocated to the second identification information. The identification information associated with the control data matching the numerical value of the second identification information random number is determined as the second identification information, and the combination of identification information derived and displayed does not result in the special display result. Corresponding to control data matching the numerical value of the third identification information random number extracted in the third identification information table in which control data is allocated to three identification information Gaming machine, characterized in that the identification information is determined to the third identification information. When the identification information determining means specifies that the transition to the specific gaming state is made based on the pre-determined command, the ratio of the specific display result that determines the combination of identification information that is derived and displayed is The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the game machine is determined using data set so as to be non-uniform. When the combination of identification information becomes the special display result of the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, the identification information is displayed as the display result of the variable display compared to the normal display after the specific gaming state ends. A gaming machine that transitions to a special gaming state in which the combination is likely to result in the specific display result,
The pre-determining means determines whether or not to shift to the special gaming state, whether or not to execute a special notification effect for notifying that the transition to the special gaming state is derived after displaying the display result of the variable display and the special gaming state. The timing for executing the notification effect is also determined before the display result is derived,
The identification information determination means
When it is specified that the transition to the special gaming state is not performed or the execution of the special notification effect is specified based on a predetermined command, the combination of identification information derived and displayed is different from the special display result. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the non-special display result is determined. The identification information includes special identification information that becomes a special display result when the combination of identification information results in a specific display result, and non-special that becomes a non-special display result when the combination of identification information results in the specific display result. Identification information,
The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the identification information displayed during the special gaming state has a higher ratio of the special identification information than the identification information displayed during the normal state. A gaming machine that shifts to a special gaming state based on a combination of identification information as a display result of variable display and a special display result,
The identification information determination means is derived and displayed when it is determined that the special display result is based on a pre-determined command, and when it is specified that the game state is shifted to the special gaming state based on the pre-determined command. The gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, wherein a combination of identification information is determined as the special display result. In the variable display device, a plurality of effective lines capable of deriving and displaying a combination of identification information are set in advance, and when a special effect is executed during variable display of the identification information, a special effective line is selected from the plurality of effective lines. A gaming machine that derives and displays a display result,
The identification information determination means is set so that the combination of identification information does not result in the special display result even on an active line other than the specific active line when it is specified that the reach is not reached and the game state is not shifted to the specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the third identification information is determined using the third identification information table. A plurality of effective lines capable of deriving and displaying a combination of identification information in the variable display device are set in advance,
The identification information determining means controls the control data so that the difference between the reach identification information and the final stop identification information is different when reach is established on a single effective line and when reach is established on a plurality of effective lines. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the difference is determined using a difference determination table to which is allocated.

Images